Apparatus for determining multi-bit data via light received by a light receiver and coupled to spectral sensors that measure light in spectral bands

ABSTRACT

Optical characteristic measuring systems and methods such as for determining the color or other optical characteristics of teeth are disclosed. Perimeter receiver fiber optics preferably are spaced apart from a source fiber optic and receive light from the surface of the object/tooth being measured. Light from the perimeter fiber optics pass to a variety of filters. The system utilizes the perimeter receiver fiber optics to determine information regarding the height and angle of the probe with respect to the object/tooth being measured. Under processor control, the optical characteristics measurement may be made at a predetermined height and angle. Various color spectral photometer arrangements are disclosed. Translucency, fluorescence, gloss and/or surface texture data also may be obtained. Audio feedback may be provided to guide operator use of the system. The probe may have a removable or shielded tip for contamination prevention. A method of producing dental prostheses based on measured data also is disclosed. Measured data also may be stored and/or organized as part of a patient data base. Such methods and implements may be desirably utilized for purposes of detecting and preventing counterfeiting or the like. Low cost and small form factor spectrometers, and methods for manufacturing the same, also are disclosed. Spectrometers and spectrophotometers embedded in printing and scanning and other type devices, as well as computer companion devices, scope-type devices and the like, also are disclosed. Data encoding based on such devices also may be implemented.

This is a continuation of application Ser. No. 09/524,121, filed Mar.13, 2000, U.S. Pat. No. 6,373,573 which is a continuation-in-part ofSer. No. 09/267,825, filed Mar. 12, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,307,629;which is a continuation of Ser. No. 08/909,989, filed Aug. 12, 1997, nowU.S. Pat. No. 5,883,708; which is a continuation of Ser. No. 08/581,851,filed Jan. 2, 1996, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,745,229.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to devices and methods for measuringoptical characteristics such as color spectrums, translucence, gloss,and other characteristics of objects such as teeth, and moreparticularly to devices and methods for measuring the color and otheroptical characteristics of teeth, fabric or numerous other objects,materials or surfaces with a hand-held probe that presents minimalproblems with height or angular dependencies and that may be applied todetecting and preventing counterfeiting. The present invention alsopertains to systems and methods for quantifying optical properties ofmaterials and objects, including as a part of a variety of industrialapplications, and including spectrometers designed and manufactured tohave fast operation, small form factors and low manufacturing costs.Embodiments include spectrometers and spectrophotometers embedded inprinting and scanning and other type devices, as well as computercompanion devices, scope-type devices and the like. Data encoding basedon such devices also may be implemented.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

A need has been recognized for devices and methods of measuring thecolor or other optical characteristics of teeth and other objects in thefield of dentistry. There is also a need for devices and methods fordetecting and preventing counterfeiting and the like based onmeasurements of various optical characteristics or properties of objectsand materials. Various color measuring devices such asspectrophotometers and colorimeters are known in the art. To understandthe limitations of such conventional devices, it is helpful tounderstand certain principles relating to color. Without being bound bytheory, Applicants provide the following discussion. In the discussionherein, reference is made to an “object,” “material,” “surface,” etc.,and it should be understood that in general such discussion may includeteeth as well as other objects or materials as the “object,” “material,”“surface,” etc.

The color of an object determines the manner in which light is reflectedfrom the object. When light is incident upon an object, the reflectedlight will vary in intensity and wavelength dependent upon the color ofthe object. Thus, a red object will reflect red light with a greaterintensity than a blue or a green object, and correspondingly a greenobject will reflect green light with a greater intensity than a red orblue object.

The optical properties of an object are also affected by the manner inwhich light is reflected from the surface. Glossy objects, those thatreflect light specularly such as mirrors or other highly polishedsurfaces, reflect light differently than diffuse objects or those thatreflect light in all directions, such as the reflection from a rough orotherwise non-polished surface. Although both objects may have the samecolor and exhibit the same reflectance or absorption optical spectralresponses, their appearances differ because of the manner in which theyreflect light.

Additionally, many objects may be translucent or have semi-translucentsurfaces or thin layers covering their surfaces. Examples of suchmaterials are teeth, which have a complicated structure consisting of anouter enamel layer and an inner dentin layer. The outer enamel layer issemitranslucent. The inner layers are also translucent to a greater orlesser degree. Such materials and objects also appear different fromobjects that are opaque, even though they may be the same color becauseof the manner in which they can propagate light in the translucent layerand emit the light ray displaced from its point of entry.

One method of quantifying the color of an object is to illuminate itwith broad band spectrum or “white” light, and measure the spectralproperties of the reflected light over the entire visible spectrum andcompare the reflected spectrum with the incident light spectrum. Suchinstruments typically require a broad band spectrophotometer, whichgenerally are expensive, bulky and relatively cumbersome to operate,thereby limiting the practical application of such instruments.

For certain applications, the broad band data provided by aspectrophotometer is unnecessary. For such applications, devices havebeen produced or proposed that quantify color in terms of a numericalvalue or relatively small set of values representative of the color ofthe object.

It is known that the color of an object can be represented by threevalues. For example, the color of an object can be represented by red,green and blue values, an intensity value and color difference values,by a CIE value, or by what are known as “tristimulus values” or numerousother orthogonal combinations. For most tristimulus systems, the threevalues are orthogonal; i.e., any combination of two elements in the setcannot be included in the third element.

One such method of quantifying the color of an object is to illuminatean object with broad band “white” light and measure the intensity of thereflected light after it has been passed through narrow band filters.Typically three filters (such as red, green and blue) are used toprovide tristimulus light values representative of the color of thesurface. Yet another method is to illuminate an object with threemonochromatic light sources or narrow band light sources (such as red,green and blue) one at a time and then measure the intensity of thereflected light with a single light sensor. The three measurements arethen converted to a tristimulus value representative of the color of thesurface. Such color measurement techniques can be utilized to produceequivalent tristimulus values representative of the color of thesurface. Generally, it does not matter if a “white” light source is usedwith a plurality of color sensors (or a continuum in the case of aspectrophotometer), or if a plurality of colored light sources areutilized with a single light sensor.

There are, however, difficulties with the conventional techniques. Whenlight is incident upon a surface and reflected to a light receiver, theheight of the light sensor and the angle of the sensor relative to thesurface and to the light source also affect the intensity of thereceived light. Since the color determination is being made by measuringand quantifying the intensity of the received light for differentcolors, it is important that the height and angular dependency of thelight receiver be eliminated or accounted for in some manner.

One method for eliminating the height and angular dependency of thelight source and receiver is to provide a fixed mounting arrangementwhere the light source and receiver are stationary and the object isalways positioned and measured at a preset height and angle. The fixedmounting arrangement greatly limits the applicability of such a method.Another method is to add mounting feet to the light source and receiverprobe and to touch the object with the probe to maintain a constantheight and angle. The feet in such an apparatus must be wide enoughapart to insure that a constant angle (usually perpendicular) ismaintained relative to the object. Such an apparatus tends to be verydifficult to utilize on small objects or on objects that are hard toreach, and in general does not work satisfactorily in measuring objectswith curved surfaces. Such devices are particularly difficult toimplement in the field of dentistry.

The use of color measuring devices in the field of dentistry has beenproposed. In modern dentistry, the color of teeth typically arequantified by manually comparing a patient's teeth with a set of “shadeguides.” There are numerous shade guides available for dentists in orderto properly select the desired color of dental prosthesis. Such shadeguides have been utilized for decades and the color determination ismade subjectively by the dentist by holding a set of shade guides nextto a patient's teeth and attempting to find the best match.Unfortunately, however, the best match often is affected by the ambientlight color in the dental operatory and the surrounding color of thepatient's makeup or clothing and by the fatigue level of the dentist. Inaddition, such pseudo trial and error methods based on subjectivematching with existing industry shade guides for forming dentalprostheses, fillings and the like often result in unacceptable colormatching, with the result that the prosthesis needs to be remade,leading to increased costs and inconvenience to the patient, dentalprofessional and/or prosthesis manufacturer.

Similar subjective color quantification also is made in the paintindustry by comparing the color of an object with a paint referenceguide. There are numerous paint guides available in the industry and thecolor determination also often is affected by ambient light color, userfatigue and the color sensitivity of the user. Many individuals arecolor insensitive (color blind) to certain colors, further complicatingcolor determination.

In general, color quantification is needed in many industries. Several,but certainly not all, applications include: dentistry (color of teeth);dermatology (color of skin lesions); interior decorating (color ofpaint, fabrics); the textile industry; automotive repair (matching paintcolors); photography (color of reproductions, color reference ofphotographs to the object being photographed); printing and lithography;cosmetics (hair and skin color, makeup matching); and other applicationsin which it useful to measure color in an expedient and reliable manner.

While a need has been recognized in the field of dentistry, however, thelimitations of conventional color/optical measuring techniques typicallyrestrict the utility of such techniques. For example, the high cost andbulkiness of typical broad band spectrometers, and the fixed mountingarrangements or feet required to address the height and angulardependency, often limit the applicability of such conventionaltechniques.

Moreover, another limitation of such conventional methods and devicesare that the resolution of the height and angular dependency problemstypically require contact with the object being measured. In certainapplications, it may be desirable to measure and quantify the color ofan object with a small probe that does not require contact with thesurface of the object. In certain applications, for example, hygienicconsiderations make such contact undesirable. In the other applicationssuch as interior decorating, contact with the object can mar the surface(such as if the object is coated in some manner) or otherwise causeundesirable effects.

In summary, there is a need for a low cost, hand-held probe of smallsize that can reliably measure and quantify the color and other opticalcharacteristics of an object without requiring physical contact with theobject, and also a need for methods based on such a device in the fieldof dentistry and other applications.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In accordance with the present invention, devices and methods areprovided for measuring the color and other optical characteristics ofobjects such as teeth, reliably and with minimal problems of height andangular dependence and which may be applied to detecting or preventingcounterfeiting or the like. A handheld probe is utilized in the presentinvention, with the handheld probe containing a number of fiber opticsin certain preferred embodiments. Light is directed from one (or more)light source(s) towards the object/tooth to be measured, which incertain preferred embodiments is a central light source fiber optic(other light sources and light source arrangements also may beutilized). Light reflected from the object is detected by a number oflight receivers. Included in the light receivers (which may be lightreceiver fiber optics) are a plurality of perimeter and/or broadband orother receivers (which may be light receiver fiber optics, etc.). Incertain preferred embodiments, a number of groups of perimeter fiberoptics are utilized in order to take measurements at a desired, andpredetermined height and angle, thereby minimizing height and angulardependency problems found in conventional methods, and to quantify otheroptical characteristics such as gloss. In certain embodiments, thepresent invention also may measure gloss, translucence and fluorescencecharacteristics of the object/tooth being measured, as well as surfacetexture and/or other optical or surface characteristics. In certainembodiments, the present invention may distinguish the surface spectralreflectance response and also a bulk spectral response.

The present invention may include constituent elements of a broad bandspectrophotometer, or, alternatively, may include constituent elementsof a tristimulus type colorimeter. The present invention may employ avariety of color measuring devices in order to measure color and otheroptical characteristics in a practical, reliable and efficient manner,and in certain preferred embodiments includes a color filter array and aplurality of color sensors. A microprocessor is included for control andcalculation purposes. A temperature sensor is included to measuretemperature in order to detect abnormal conditions and/or to compensatefor temperature effects of the filters or other components of thesystem. In addition, the present invention may include audio feedback toguide the operator in making color/optical measurements, as well as oneor more display devices for displaying control, status or otherinformation.

With the present invention, color/optical measurements of teeth or thelike may be made with a handheld probe in a practical and reliablemanner, essentially free of height and angular dependency problems,without resorting to fixtures, feet or other undesirable mechanicalarrangements for fixing the height and angle of the probe with respectto the object/tooth. In addition, the present invention includes methodsof using such color measurement data to implement processes for formingdental prostheses and the like, as well as methods for keeping suchcolor and/or other data as part of a patient record database.

Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to addresslimitations of conventional color/optical measuring techniques.

It is another object of the present invention to provide a method anddevice useful in measuring the color or other optical characteristics ofteeth, fabric or other objects or surfaces with a hand-held probe ofpractical size that may advantageously utilize, but does not necessarilyrequire, contact with the object or surface.

It is a further object of the present invention to provide acolor/optical measurement probe and method that does not require fixedposition mechanical mounting, feet or other mechanical impediments.

It is yet another object of the present invention to provide a probe andmethod useful for measuring color and/or other optical characteristicsthat may be utilized with a probe simply placed near the surface to bemeasured.

It is a still further object of the present invention to provide a probeand method that are capable of determining translucency characteristicsof the object being measured.

It is a still further object of the present invention to provide a probeand method that are capable of determining translucency characteristicsof the object being measured by making measurements from one side of theobject.

It is a further object of the present invention to provide a probe andmethod that are capable of determining surface texture characteristicsof the object/tooth being measured.

It is a still further object of the present invention to provide a probeand method that are capable of determining fluorescence characteristicsof the object/tooth being measured.

It is yet a further object of the present invention to provide a probeand method that are capable of determining gloss (or degree of specularreflectance) characteristics of the object/tooth being measured.

It is another object of the present invention to provide a probe andmethod that can measure the area of a small spot singularly, or thatalso can measure the color of irregular shapes by moving the probe overan area and integrating the color of the entire area.

It is a further object of the present invention to provide a method ofmeasuring the color of teeth and preparing dental prostheses, dentures,intraoral tooth-colored fillings or other materials.

It is yet another object of the present invention to provide a methodand apparatus that minimizes contamination problems, while providing areliable and expedient manner in which to measure teeth and preparedental prostheses, dentures, intraoral tooth-colored fillings or othermaterials.

It is an object of the present invention to provide methods of usingmeasured data to implement processes for forming dental prostheses andthe like, as well as methods for keeping such measurement and/or otherdata as part of a patient record database.

It also is an object of the present invention to provide probes andmethods for measuring optical characteristics with a probe that is heldsubstantially stationary with respect to the object or tooth beingmeasured.

It is another object the present invention to provide probes, equipmentand methods for detecting and preventing counterfeiting or the like byway of measuring or assessing surface or subsurface opticalcharacteristics or features.

It is an object of the present invention to provide probes and methodsfor measuring optical characteristics with a probe that may have aremovable tip or shield that may be removed for cleaning, disposed afteruse or the like.

Finally, it is an object of the present invention to provide a varietyof small form factor, low cost spectrometer designs and methods formanufacturing the same.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The present invention may be more fully understood by a description ofcertain preferred embodiments in conjunction with the attached drawingsin which:

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a preferred embodiment of the presentinvention;

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a cross section of a probe that may beused in accordance with certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an illustrative arrangement of fiberoptic receivers and sensors utilized with certain embodiments;

FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate certain geometric considerations of fiberoptics;

FIGS. 5A and 5B illustrate the light amplitude received by fiber opticlight receivers as the receivers are moved towards and away from anobject;

FIG. 6 is a flow chart illustrating a color measuring method inaccordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a protective cap that may be used withcertain embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate removable probe tips that may be used withcertain embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 9 illustrates a fiber optic bundle in accordance with anotherembodiment, which may serve to further the understanding of preferredembodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 10A, 10B, 10C and 10D illustrate and describe other fiber opticbundle configurations and principles, which may serve to further theunderstanding of preferred embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 11 illustrates a linear optical sensor array that may be used incertain embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 12 illustrates a matrix optical sensor array that may be used incertain embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate certain optical properties of a filterarray that may be used in certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate examples of received light intensities ofreceivers used in certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 15 is a flow chart illustrating audio tones that may be used incertain preferred embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 16A and 16B are flow charts illustrating dental prosthesismanufacturing methods in accordance with certain preferred embodimentsof the present invention;

FIGS. 17A and 17B illustrate a positioning implement used in certainembodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 18 is a flow chart illustrating a patient database method inaccordance with certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 19 illustrates an integrated unit in accordance with the presentinvention that includes a measuring device and other implements;

FIG. 20 illustrates an embodiment, which utilizes a plurality of ringsof light receivers that may be utilized to take measurements with theprobe held substantially stationary with respect to the object beingmeasured, which may serve to further the understanding of preferredembodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 21 and 22 illustrate an embodiment, which utilizes a mechanicalmovement and also may be utilized to take measurements with the probeheld substantially stationary with respect to the object being measured,which may serve to further the understanding of preferred embodiments ofthe present invention;

FIGS. 23A to 23C illustrate embodiments of the present invention inwhich coherent light conduits may serve as removable probe tips;

FIGS. 24, 25 and 26 illustrate further embodiments of the presentinvention utilizing intraoral reflectometers, intraoral cameras and/orcolor calibration charts in accordance with the present invention;

FIG. 27 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention in which aninteroral camera and/or other instruments in accordance with the presentinvention may be adapted for use with a dental chair;

FIGS. 28A and 28B illustrate cross sections of probes that may be usedin accordance with preferred embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 29 and 30A and 30B illustrate certain geometric and otherproperties of fiber optics for purposes of understanding certainpreferred embodiments;

FIGS. 31A and 31B illustrate probes for measuring “specular-excluded”type spectrums in accordance with the present invention;

FIGS. 32, 33 and 34 illustrate embodiments in which intra oral camerasand reflectometer type instruments in accordance with the presentinvention are integrated;

FIGS. 35 and 36 illustrate certain handheld embodiments of the presentinvention;

FIGS. 37A and 37B illustrate a tooth dental object in cross section,illustrating how embodiments of the present invention may be used toassess subsurface characteristics of various types of objects;

FIGS. 38 to 50 illustrate other embodiments (systems, sources,receivers, etc.), aspects and features within the scope of the presentinvention;

FIGS. 51A to 51C illustrate materials or object portions for purposes ofexplaining preferred embodiments of methods and devices for detecting orpreventing counterfeiting or the like;

FIGS. 52 to 58 illustrate yet other embodiments (systems, sources,receivers, methods, etc.), aspects and features within the scope of thepresent invention, including implements having a central receiverelement and detecting and quantifying flex of a cable;

FIG. 59 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention employing alinear optical sensor;

FIG. 60 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention in whichlight is split and provided to a spectrometer and wideband sensor(s);

FIGS. 61 and 62 illustrate embodiments employing a CCD sensing element;

FIGS. 63 to 65 illustrate various embodiments employing various ways toprovide light to optical sensors in accordance with various embodimentsof the present invention;

FIGS. 66A to 67B illustrate various aspects of integrating spheres inaccordance with the present invention;

FIGS. 68 to 70 illustrate embodiments of the present invention utilizingvarious relay or other type filters;

FIG. 71 illustrates a preferred embodiment of a miniature spectrometerin accordance with the present invention;

FIGS. 72 to 73B illustrate aspects of a non-coherent light guide used inaccordance with certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 74A to 79 illustrate various preferred embodiments of an opticalmanifold in accordance with certain preferred embodiments of the presentinvention;

FIGS. 80A and 80B illustrate another preferred embodiment of a miniaturespectrometer in accordance with the present invention;

FIGS. 81 to 83 illustrate other aspects of a non-coherent light guideused in accordance with certain embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 84 to 87 illustrate other aspects/embodiments of miniaturespectrometers in accordance with the present invention;

FIG. 88 are timing charts relating to a preferred type of sensor used inaccordance with certain preferred embodiments of the present invention;

FIGS. 89A and 89B illustrate a spacer/manifold for providing light biasto optical sensors in accordance with certain embodiments of the presentinvention;

FIGS. 90A to 90E illustrate flow charts utilized in certain preferredexemplary embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 91 illustrates a highly integrated, miniature spectrometer inaccordance with one preferred embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 92 is a general manufacturing flow chart for illustrating variousexemplary manufacturing methods in accordance with certain preferredembodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 93 is diagram illustrating certain preferred embodiments in whichspectrometers or spectrophotometers are included as part of a printingor scanning type device;

FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a number of systems connected to anetwork;

FIG. 95 illustrates spectrometers or spectrophotometers implemented as acomputer companion device, such as a mouse or PC card, USB connection orthe like;

FIG. 96 illustrates spectrometer or spectrophotometers as part of scopedevice; and

FIGS. 97-99 illustrate data encoding with certain preferred embodimentsof the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

The present invention will be described in greater detail with referenceto certain preferred embodiments and certain other embodiments, whichmay serve to further the understanding of preferred embodiments of thepresent invention. At various places herein, reference is made to an“object,” “material,” “surface,” etc., for example. It should beunderstood that an exemplary use of the present invention is in thefield of dentistry, and thus the object typically should be understoodto include teeth, dentures or other prosthesis or restorations,dental-type cements or the like or other dental objects, although fordiscussion purposes in certain instances reference is only made to the“object.” As described elsewhere herein, various refinements andsubstitutions of the various embodiments are possible based on theprinciples and teachings herein.

With reference to FIG. 1, an exemplary preferred embodiment of acolor/optical characteristic measuring system and method in accordancewith the present invention will be described. It should be noted that,at various places herein, such a color measuring system is sometimesreferred to as an intraoral reflectometer, etc.

Probe tip 1 encloses a plurality of fiber optics, each of which mayconstitute one or more fiber optic fibers. In a preferred embodiment,the fiber optics contained within probe tip 1 includes a single lightsource fiber optic and a number of groups of light receiver fiberoptics. The use of such fiber optics to measure the color or otheroptical characteristics of an object will be described later herein.Probe tip 1 is attached to probe body 2, on which is fixed switch 17.Switch 17 communicates with microprocessor 10 through wire 18 andprovides, for example, a mechanism by which an operator may activate thedevice in order to make a color/optical measurement. Fiber optics withinprobe tip 1 terminate at the forward end thereof (i.e., the end awayfrom probe body 2). The forward end of probe tip 1 is directed towardsthe surface of the object to be measured as described more fully below.The fiber optics within probe tip 1 optically extend through probe body2 and through fiber optic cable 3 to light sensors 8, which are coupledto microprocessor 10.

It should be noted that microprocessor 10 includes conventionalassociated components, such as memory (programmable memory, such asPROM, EPROM or EEPROM; working memory such as DRAMs or SRAMs; and/orother types of memory such as non-volatile memory, such as FLASH),peripheral circuits, clocks and power supplies, although for claritysuch components are not explicitly shown. Other types of computingdevices (such as other microprocessor systems, programmable logic arraysor the like) are used in other embodiments of the present invention.

In the embodiment of FIG. 1, the fiber optics from fiber optic cable 3end at splicing connector 4. From splicing connector 4, each or some ofthe receiver fiber optics used in this embodiment is/are spliced into anumber of smaller fiber optics (generally denoted as fibers 7), which inthis embodiment are fibers of equal diameter, but which in otherpreferred embodiments may be of unequal diameter and/or numeric aperture(NA) (including, for example, larger or smaller “height/angle” orperimeter fibers, as more fully described herein). One of the fibers ofeach group of fibers may pass to light sensors 8 through a neutraldensity filter (as more fully described with reference to FIG. 3), andcollectively such neutrally filtered fibers may be utilized for purposesof height/angle determination, translucency determination and glossdetermination (and also may be utilized to measure other surfacecharacteristics, as more fully described herein). Remaining fibers ofeach group of fibers may pass to light sensors 8 through color filtersand may be used to make color/optical measurements. In still otherembodiments, splicing connector 4 is not used, and fiber bundles of, forexample, five or more fibers each extend from light sensors 8 to theforward end of probe tip 1. In certain embodiments, unused fibers orother materials may be included as part of a bundle of fibers forpurposes of, for example, easing the manufacturing process for the fiberbundle. What should be noted is that, for purposes of the presentinvention, a plurality of light receiver fiber optics or elements (suchas fibers 7) are presented to light sensors 8, with the light from thelight receiver fiber optics/elements representing light reflected fromobject 20. While the various embodiments described herein presenttradeoffs and benefits that may not have been apparent prior to thepresent invention (and thus may be independently novel), what isimportant for the present discussion is that light from fiberoptics/elements at the forward end of probe tip 1 is presented tosensors 8 for color/optical measurements and angle/height determination,etc. In particular, fiber optic configurations of certain preferredembodiments will be explained in more detail hereinafter.

Light source 11 in the preferred embodiment is a halogen light source(of, for example, 5-100 watts, with the particular wattage chosen forthe particular application), which may be under the control ofmicroprocessor 10. The light from light source 11 reflects from coldmirror 6 and into source fiber optic 5. Source fiber optic 5 passesthrough to the forward end of probe tip 1 and provides the lightstimulus used for purposes of making the measurements described herein.Cold mirror 6 reflects visible light and passes infra-red light, and isused to reduce the amount of infra-red light produced by light source 11before the light is introduced into source fiber optic 5. Such infra-redlight reduction of the light from a halogen source such as light source11 can help prevent saturation of the receiving light sensors, which canreduce overall system sensitivity. Fiber 15 receives light directly fromlight source 11 and passes through to light sensors 8 (which may bethrough a neutral density filter). Microprocessor 10 monitors the lightoutput of light source 11 through fiber 15, and thus may monitor and, ifnecessary compensate for, drift of the output of light source 11. Incertain embodiments, microprocessor 10 also may sound an alarm (such asthrough speaker 16) or otherwise provide some indication if abnormal orother undesired performance of light source 11 is detected.

The data output from light sensors 8 pass to microprocessor 10.Microprocessor 10 processes the data from light sensors 8 to produce ameasurement of color and/or other characteristics. Microprocessor 10also is coupled to key pad switches 12, which serve as an input device.Through key pad switches 12, the operator may input control informationor commands, or information relating to the object being measured or thelike. In general, key pad switches 12, or other suitable data inputdevices (such as push button, toggle, membrane or other switches or thelike), serve as a mechanism to input desired information tomicroprocessor 10.

Microprocessor 10 also communicates with UART 13, which enablesmicroprocessor 10 to be coupled to an external device such as computer13A. In such embodiments, data provided by microprocessor 10 may beprocessed as desired for the particular application, such as foraveraging, format conversion or for various display or print options,etc. In the preferred embodiment, UART 13 is configured so as to providewhat is known as a RS232 interface, such as is commonly found inpersonal computers.

Microprocessor 10 also communicates with LCD 14 for purposes ofdisplaying status, control or other information as desired for theparticular application. For example, color bars, charts or other graphicrepresentations of the color or other collected data and/or the measuredobject or tooth may be displayed. In other embodiments, other displaydevices are used, such as CRTs, matrix-type LEDs, lights or othermechanisms for producing a visible indicia of system status or the like.Upon system initialization, for example, LCD 14 may provide anindication that the system is stable, ready and available for takingcolor measurements.

Also coupled to microprocessor 10 is speaker 16. Speaker 16, in apreferred embodiment as discussed more fully below, serves to provideaudio feedback to the operator, which may serve to guide the operator inthe use of the device. Speaker 16 also may serve to provide status orother information alerting the operator of the condition of the system,including an audio tone, beeps or other audible indication (i.e., voice)that the system is initialized and available for taking measurements.Speaker 16 also may present audio information indicative of the measureddata, shade guide or reference values corresponding to the measureddata, or an indication of the status of the color/optical measurements.

Microprocessor 10 also receives an input from temperature sensor 9.Given that many types of filters (and perhaps light sources or othercomponents) may operate reliably only in a given temperature range,temperature sensor 9 serves to provide temperature information tomicroprocessor 10. In particular, color filters, such as may be includedin light sensors 8, may be sensitive to temperature, and may operatereliably only over a certain temperature range. In certain embodiments,if the temperature is within a usable range, microprocessor 10 maycompensate for temperature variations of the color filters. In suchembodiments, the color filters are characterized as to filteringcharacteristics as a function of temperature, either by data provided bythe filter manufacturer, or through measurement as a function oftemperature. Such filter temperature compensation data may be stored inthe form of a look-up table in memory, or may be stored as a set ofpolynomial coefficients from which the temperature characteristics ofthe filters may be computed by microprocessor 10.

In general, under control of microprocessor 10, which may be in responseto operator activation (through, for example, key pad switches 12 orswitch 17), light is directed from light source 11, and reflected fromcold mirror 6 through source fiber optic 5 (and through fiber opticcable 3, probe body 2 and probe tip 1) or through some other suitablelight source element and is directed onto object 20. Light reflectedfrom object 20 passes through the receiver fiber optics/elements inprobe tip 1 to light sensors 8 (through probe body 2, fiber optic cable3 and fibers 7). Based on the information produced by light sensors 8,microprocessor 10 produces a color/optical measurement result or otherinformation to the operator. Color measurement or other data produced bymicroprocessor 10 may be displayed on display 14, passed through UART 13to computer 13A, or used to generate audio information that is presentedto speaker 16. Other operational aspects of the preferred embodimentillustrated in FIG. 1 will be explained hereinafter.

With reference to FIG. 2, an embodiment of a fiber optic arrangementpresented at the forward end of probe tip 1 will now be described, whichmay serve to further the understanding of preferred embodiments of thepresent invention. As illustrated in FIG. 2, this embodiment utilizes asingle central light source fiber optic, denoted as light source fiberoptic S, and a plurality of perimeter light receiver fiber optics,denoted as light receivers R1, R2 and R3. As is illustrated, thisembodiment utilizes three perimeter fiber optics, although in otherembodiments two, four or some other number of receiver fiber optics areutilized. As more fully described herein, the perimeter light receiverfiber optics serve not only to provide reflected light for purposes ofmaking the color/optical measurement, but such perimeter fibers alsoserve to provide information regarding the angle and height of probe tip1 with respect to the surface of the object that is being measured, andalso may provide information regarding the surface characteristics ofthe object that is being measured.

In the illustrated embodiment, receiver fiber optics R1 to R3 arepositioned symmetrically around source fiber optic S, with a spacing ofabout 120 degrees from each other. It should be noted that spacing t isprovided between receiver fiber optics R1 to R3 and source fiber opticS. While the precise angular placement of the receiver fiber opticsaround the perimeter of the fiber bundle in general is not critical, ithas been determined that three receiver fiber optics positioned 120degrees apart generally may give acceptable results. As discussed above,in certain embodiments light receiver fiber optics R1 to R3 eachconstitute a single fiber, which is divided at splicing connector 4(refer again to FIG. 1), or, in alternate embodiments, light receiverfiber optics R1 to R3 each constitute a bundle of fibers, numbering, forexample, at least five fibers per bundle. It has been determined that,with available fibers of uniform size, a bundle of, for example, sevenfibers may be readily produced (although as will be apparent to one ofskill in the art, the precise number of fibers may be determined in viewof the desired number of receiver fiber optics, manufacturingconsiderations, etc.). The use of light receiver fiber optics R1 to R3to produce color/optical measurements is further described elsewhereherein, although it may be noted here that receiver fiber optics R1 toR3 may serve to detect whether, for example, the angle of probe tip 1with respect to the surface of the object being measured is at 90degrees, or if the surface of the object being measured contains surfacetexture and/or spectral irregularities. In the case where probe tip 1 isperpendicular to the surface of the object being measured and thesurface of the object being measured is a diffuse reflector (i.e., amatte-type reflector, as compared to a glossy or spectral or shiny-typereflector which may have “hot spots”), then the light intensity inputinto the perimeter fibers should be approximately equal. It also shouldbe noted that spacing t serves to adjust the optimal height at whichcolor/optical measurements should be made (as more fully describedbelow). Preferred embodiments, as described hereinafter, may enable thequantification of the gloss or degree of spectral reflection of theobject being measured.

In one particular aspect useful with embodiments of the presentinvention, area between the fiber optics on probe tip 1 may be wholly orpartially filled with a non-reflective material and/or surface (whichmay be a black mat, contoured or other non-reflective surface). Havingsuch exposed area of probe tip 1 non-reflective helps to reduceundesired reflections, thereby helping to increase the accuracy andreliability.

With reference to FIG. 3, a partial arrangement of light receiver fiberoptics and sensors that may be used in a preferred embodiment of thepresent invention will now be described. Fibers 7 represent lightreceiving fiber optics, which transmit light reflected from the objectbeing measured to light sensors 8. In an exemplary embodiment, sixteensensors (two sets of eight) are utilized, although for ease ofdiscussion only 8 are illustrated in FIG. 3 (in this preferredembodiment, the circuitry of FIG. 3 is duplicated, for example, in orderto result in sixteen sensors). In other embodiments, other numbers ofsensors are utilized in accordance with the present invention.

Light from fibers 7 is presented to sensors 8, which in a preferredembodiment pass through filters 22 to sensing elements 24. In thispreferred embodiment, sensing elements 24 include light-to-frequencyconverters, manufactured by Texas Instruments and sold under the partnumber TSL230. Such converters constitute, in general, photo diodearrays that integrate the light received from fibers 7 and output an ACsignal with a frequency proportional to the intensity (not frequency) ofthe incident light. Without being bound by theory, the basic principleof such devices is that, as the intensity increases, the integratoroutput voltage rises more quickly, and the shorter the integrator risetime, the greater the output frequency. The outputs of the TSL230sensors are TTL compatible digital signals, which may be coupled tovarious digital logic devices.

The outputs of sensing elements 24 are, in this embodiment, asynchronoussignals of frequencies depending upon the light intensity presented tothe particular sensing elements, which are presented to processor 26. Ina preferred embodiment, processor 26 is a Microchip PIC16C55 or PIC16C57microprocessor, which as described more fully herein implements analgorithm to measure the frequencies of the signals output by sensingelements 24. In other embodiments, a more integratedmicroprocessor/microcontroller, such as Hitachi's SH RISCmicrocontrollers, is utilized to provide further system integration orthe like.

As previously described, processor 26 measures the frequencies of thesignals output from sensing elements 24. In a preferred embodiment,processor 26 implements a software timing loop, and at periodicintervals processor 26 reads the states of the outputs of sensingelements 24. An internal counter is incremented each pass through thesoftware timing loop. The accuracy of the timing loop generally isdetermined by the crystal oscillator time base (not shown in FIG. 3)coupled to processor 26 (such oscillators typically are quite stable).After reading the outputs of sensing elements 24, processor 26 performsan exclusive OR (“XOR”) operation with the last data read (in apreferred embodiment such data is read in byte length). If any bit haschanged, the XOR operation will produce a 1, and, if no bits havechanged, the XOR operation will produce a 0. If the result is non-zero,the input byte is saved along with the value of the internal counter(that is incremented each pass through the software timing loop). If theresult is zero, the systems waits (e.g., executes no operationinstructions) the same amount of time as if the data had to be saved,and the looping operation continues. The process continues until alleight inputs have changed at least twice, which enables measurement of afull ½period of each input. Upon conclusion of the looping process,processor 26 analyzes the stored input bytes and internal counterstates. There should be 2 to 16 saved inputs (for the 8 total sensors ofFIG. 3) and counter states (if two or more inputs change at the sametime, they are saved simultaneously). As will be understood by one ofskill in the art, the stored values of the internal counter containsinformation determinative of the period of the signals received fromsensing elements 24. By proper subtraction of internal counter values attimes when an input bit has changed, the period may be calculated. Suchperiods calculated for each of the outputs of sensing elements isprovided by processor 26 to microprocessor 10 (see, e.g., FIG. 1). Fromsuch calculated periods, a measure of the received light intensities maybe calculated. In alternate embodiments, the frequency of the outputs ofthe TSL230 sensors is measured directly by a similar software loop asthe one described above. The outputs are monitored by the RISC processorin a software timing loop and are XORed with the previous input asdescribed above. If a transition occurs for a particular TSL230 input, acounter register for the particular TSL230 input is incremented. Thesoftware loop is executed for a pre-determined period of time and thefrequency of the input is calculated by dividing the number oftransitions by the pre-determined time and scaling the result. It willalso be apparent to one skilled in the art that more sophisticatedmeasurement schemes can also be implemented whereby both the frequencyand period are simultaneously measured by high speed RISC processorssuch as those of the Hitachi SH family.

It should be noted that the sensing circuitry and methodologyillustrated in FIG. 3 have been determined to provide a practical andexpedient manner in which to measure the light intensities received bysensing elements 24. In other embodiments, other circuits andmethodologies are employed (such other exemplary sensing schemes aredescribed elsewhere herein).

As discussed above with reference to FIG. 1, one or more of fibers 7measures light source 11, which may be through a neutral density filter,which serves to reduce the intensity of the received light in order tomaintain the intensity roughly in the range of the other received lightintensities. A number of fibers 7 also are from perimeter receiver fiberoptics R1 to R3 (see, e.g., FIG. 2) and also may pass through neutraldensity filters. Such receiving fibers 7 serve to provide data fromwhich angle/height information and/or surface characteristics may bedetermined.

The remaining twelve fibers (of the illustrated embodiment's total of 16fibers) of fibers 7 pass through color filters and are used to producethe color measurement. In an embodiment, the color filters are KodakSharp Cutting Wratten Gelatin Filters, which pass light with wavelengthsgreater than the cut-off value of the filter (i.e., redish values), andabsorb light with wavelengths less than the cut-off value of the filter(i.e., bluish values). “Sharp Cutting” filters are available in a widevariety of cut-off frequencies/wavelengths, and the cut-off valuesgenerally may be selected by proper selection of the desired cut-offfilter. In an embodiment, the filter cut-off values are chosen to coverthe entire visible spectrum and, in general, to have band spacings ofapproximately the visible band range (or other desired range) divided bythe number of receivers/filters. As an example, 700 nanometers minus 400nanometers, divided by 11 bands (produced by twelve colorreceivers/sensors), is roughly 30 nanometer band spacing.

With an array of cut-off filters as described above, and without beingbound by theory or the specific embodiments described herein, thereceived optical spectrum may be measured/calculated by subtracting thelight intensities of “adjacent” color receivers. For example, band 1(400 nm to 430 nm)=(intensity of receiver 12) minus (intensity ofreceiver 11), and so on for the remaining bands. Such an array ofcut-off filters, and the intensity values that may result from filteringwith such an array, are more fully described in connection with FIGS.13A to 14B.

It should be noted here that in alternate embodiments other color filterarrangements are utilized. For example, “notch” or bandpass filters maybe utilized, such as may be developed using Schott glass-type filters(whether constructed from separate longpass/shortpass filters orotherwise) or notch interference filters such as those manufactured byCorion, etc.

In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the specificcharacteristics of the light source, filters, sensors and fiber optics,etc., are normalized/calibrated by directing the probe towards, andmeasuring, a known color standard. Such normalization/calibration may beperformed by placing the probe in a suitable fixture, with the probedirected from a predetermined position (i.e., height and angle) from theknown color standard. Such measured normalization/calibration data maybe stored, for example, in a look-up table, and used by microprocessor10 to normalize or correct measured color or other data. Such proceduresmay be conducted at start-up, at regular periodic intervals, or byoperator command, etc. In particular embodiments, a large number ofmeasurements may be taken on materials of particular characteristics andprocessed and/or statistically analyzed or the like, with datarepresenting or derived from such measurements stored in memory (such asa look-up table or polynomial or other coefficients, etc.). Thereafter,based upon measurements of an object taken in accordance with thepresent invention, comparisons may be made with the stored data andassessments of the measured object made or predicted. In oneillustrative example, an assessment or prediction may be made of whetherthe object is wet or dry (having water or other liquid on its surface,wet paint, etc.) based on measurements in accordance with the presentinvention. In yet another illustrative example, an assessment orprediction of the characteristics of an underlying material, such as thepulpal tissue within a tooth may be made. Such capabilities may befurther enhanced by comparisons with measurements taken of the object atan earlier time, such as data taken of the tooth or other object at oneor more earlier points in time. Such comparisons based on suchhistorical data and/or stored data may allow highly useful assessmentsor predictions of the current or projected condition or status of thetooth, tissue or other object, etc. Many other industrial uses of suchsurface and subsurface assessment/prediction capabilities are possible.

What should be noted from the above description is that the receivingand sensing fiber optics and circuitry illustrated in FIG. 3 provide apractical and expedient way to determine the color and other optical orother characteristics by measuring the intensity of the light reflectedfrom the surface of the object being measured.

It also should be noted that such a system measures the spectral band ofthe reflected light from the object, and once measured such spectraldata may be utilized in a variety of ways. For example, such spectraldata may be displayed directly as intensity-wavelength band values. Inaddition, tristimulus type values may be readily computed (through, forexample, conventional matrix math), as may any other desired colorvalues. In one particular embodiment useful in dental applications (suchas for dental prostheses), the color data is output in the form of aclosest match or matches of dental shade guide value(s). In a preferredembodiment, various existing shade guides (such as the shade guidesproduced by Vita Zahnfabrik) are characterized and stored in a look-uptable, or in the graphics art industry Pantone color references, and thecolor measurement data are used to select the closest shade guide valueor values, which may be accompanied by a confidence level or othersuitable factor indicating the degree of closeness of the match ormatches, including, for example, what are known as ΔE values or rangesof ΔE values, or criteria based on standard deviations, such as standarddeviation minimization. In still other embodiments, the colormeasurement data are used (such as with look-up tables) to selectmaterials for the composition of paint or ceramics such as forprosthetic teeth. There are many other uses of such spectral datameasured in accordance with the present invention.

It is known that certain objects such as human teeth may fluoresce, andsuch optical characteristics also may be measured in accordance with thepresent invention. A light source with an ultraviolet component may beused to produce more accurate color/optical data with respect to suchobjects. Such data may be utilized to adjust the amounts and orproportions or types of dental fluorescing materials in dentalrestorations or prosthesis. In certain embodiments, a tungsten/halogensource (such as used in a preferred embodiment) may be combined with aUV light source (such as a mercury vapor, xenon or other fluorescentlight source, etc.) to produce a light output capable of causing theobject to fluoresce. Alternately, a separate UV light source, combinedwith a visible-light-blocking filter, may be used to illuminate theobject. Such a UV light source may be combined with light from a red LED(for example) in order to provide a visual indication of when the UVlight is on and also to serve as an aid for the directional positioningof the probe operating with such a light source. A second measurementmay be taken using the UV light source in a manner analogous to thatdescribed earlier, with the band of the red LED or other supplementallight source being ignored. The second measurement may thus be used toproduce an indication of the fluorescence of the tooth or other objectbeing measured. With such a UV light source, a silica fiber optic (orother suitable material) typically would be required to transmit thelight to the object (standard fiber optic materials such as glass andplastic in general do not propagate UV light in a desired manner, etc.).

As described earlier, in certain preferred embodiments the presentinvention utilizes a plurality of perimeter receiver fiber optics spacedapart from and around a central source fiber optic to measure color anddetermine information regarding the height and angle of the probe withrespect to the surface of the object being measured, which may includeother surface characteristic information, etc. Without being bound bytheory, certain principles underlying certain aspects of the presentinvention will now be described with reference to FIGS. 4A to 4C.

FIG. 4A illustrates a typical step index fiber optic consisting of acore and a cladding. For this discussion, it is assumed that the corehas an index of refraction of n₀ and the cladding has an index ofrefraction of n₁. Although the following discussion is directed to “stepindex” fibers, it will be appreciated by those of skill in the art thatsuch discussion generally is applicable for gradient index fibers aswell.

In order to propagate light without loss, the light must be incidentwithin the core of the fiber optic at an angle greater than the criticalangle, which may be represented as Sin⁻¹ {n₁/n₀ }, where n₀ is the indexof refraction of the core and n₁ is the index of refraction of thecladding. Thus, all light must enter the fiber at an acceptance angleequal to or less than phi, with phi=2×Sin⁻¹ {√(n₀ ²−n₁ ²)}, or it willnot be propagated in a desired manner.

For light entering a fiber optic, it must enter within the acceptanceangle phi. Similarly, when the light exits a fiber optic, it will exitthe fiber optic within a cone of angle phi as illustrated in FIG. 4A.The value √(n₀ ²−n₁ ²) is referred to as the aperture of the fiberoptic. For example, a typical fiber optic may have an aperture of 0.5,and an acceptance angle of 60°.

Consider using a fiber optic as a light source. One end is illuminatedby a light source (such as light source 11 of FIG. 1), and the other isheld near a surface. The fiber optic will emit a cone of light asillustrated in FIG. 4A. If the fiber optic is held perpendicular to asurface it will create a circular light pattern on the surface. As thefiber optic is raised, the radius r of the circle will increase. As thefiber optic is lowered, the radius of the light pattern will decrease.Thus, the intensity of the light (light energy per unit area) in theilluminated circular area will increase as the fiber optic is loweredand will decrease as the fiber optic is raised.

The same principle generally is true for a fiber optic being utilized asa receiver. Consider mounting a light sensor on one end of a fiber opticand holding the other end near an illuminated surface. The fiber opticcan only propagate light without loss when the light entering the fiberoptic is incident on the end of the fiber optic near the surface if thelight enters the fiber optic within its acceptance angle phi. A fiberoptic utilized as a light receiver near a surface will only accept andpropagate light from the circular area of radius r on the surface. Asthe fiber optic is raised from the surface, the area increases. As thefiber optic is lowered to the surface, the area decreases.

Consider two fiber optics parallel to each other as illustrated in FIG.4B. For simplicity of discussion, the two fiber optics illustrated areidentical in size and aperture. The following discussion, however,generally would be applicable for fiber optics that differ in size andaperture. One fiber optic is a source fiber optic, the other fiber opticis a receiver fiber optic. As the two fiber optics are heldperpendicular to a surface, the source fiber optic emits a cone of lightthat illuminates a circular area of radius r. The receiver fiber opticcan only accept light that is within its acceptance angle phi, or onlylight that is received within a cone of angle phi. If the only lightavailable is that emitted by the source fiber optic, then the only lightthat can be accepted by the receiver fiber optic is the light thatstrikes the surface at the intersection of the two circles asillustrated in FIG. 4C. As the two fiber optics are lifted from thesurface, the proportion of the intersection of the two circular areasrelative to the circular area of the source fiber optic increases. Asthey near the surface, the proportion of the intersection of the twocircular areas to the circular area of the source fiber optic decreases.If the fiber optics are held too close to the surface (i.e., at or belowa “critical height” h_(c)), the circular areas will no longer intersectand no light emitted from the source fiber optic will be received by thereceiver fiber optic.

As discussed earlier, the intensity of the light in the circular areailluminated by the source fiber increases as the fiber is lowered to thesurface. The intersection of the two cones, however, decreases as thefiber optic pair is lowered. Thus, as the fiber optic pair is lowered toa surface, the total intensity of light received by the receiver fiberoptic increases to a maximal value, and then decreases sharply as thefiber optic pair is lowered still further to the surface. Eventually,the intensity will decrease essentially to zero at or below the criticalheight h_(c) (assuming the object being measured is not translucent, asdescribed more fully herein), and will remain essentially zero until thefiber optic pair is in contact with the surface. Thus, as asource-receiver pair of fiber optics as described above are positionednear a surface and as their height is varied, the intensity of lightreceived by the receiver fiber optic reaches a maximal value at apeaking or “peaking height” h_(p).

Again without being bound by theory, an interesting property of thepeaking height h_(p) has been observed. The peaking height h_(p) is afunction primarily of the geometry of fixed parameters, such as fiberapertures, fiber diameters and fiber spacing. Since the receiver fiberoptic in the illustrated arrangement is only detecting a maximum valueand not attempting to quantify the value, its maximum in general isindependent of the surface color. It is only necessary that the surfacereflect sufficient light from the intersecting area of the source andreceiver fiber optics to be within the detection range of the receiverfiber optic light sensor. Thus, in general red or green or blue or anycolor surface will all exhibit a maximum at the same peaking heighth_(p).

Although the above discussion has focused on two fiber opticsperpendicular to a surface, similar analysis is applicable for fiberoptic pairs at other angles. When a fiber optic is not perpendicular toa surface, it generally illuminates an elliptical area. Similarly, theacceptance area of a receiver fiber optic generally becomes elliptical.As the fiber optic pair is moved closer to the surface, the receiverfiber optic also will detect a maximal value at a peaking heightindependent of the surface color or characteristics. The maximalintensity value measured when the fiber optic pair is not perpendicularto the surface, however, will be less than the maximal intensity valuemeasured when the fiber optic pair is perpendicular to the surface.

Referring now to FIGS. 5A and 5B, the intensity of light received as afiber optic source-receiver pair is moved to and from a surface will nowbe described. FIG. 5A illustrates the intensity of the received light asa function of time. Corresponding FIG. 5B illustrates the height of thefiber optic pair from the surface of the object being measured. FIGS. 5Aand 5B illustrate (for ease of discussion) a relatively uniform rate ofmotion of the fiber optic pair to and from the surface of the objectbeing measured (although similar illustrations/analysis would beapplicable for non-uniform rates as well).

FIG. 5A illustrates the intensity of received light as the fiber opticpair is moved to and then from a surface. While FIG. 5A illustrates theintensity relationship for a single receiver fiber optic, similarintensity relationships would be expected to be observed for otherreceiver fiber optics, such as, for example, the multiple receiver fiberoptics of FIGS. 1 and 2. In general with the preferred embodimentdescribed above, all fifteen fiber optic receivers (of fibers 7) willexhibit curves similar to that illustrated in FIG. 5A.

FIG. 5A illustrates five regions. In region 1, the probe is movedtowards the surface of the object being measured, which causes thereceived light intensity to increase. In region 2, the probe is movedpast the peaking height, and the received light intensity peaks and thenfalls off sharply. In region 3, the probe essentially is in contact withthe surface of the object being measured. As illustrated, the receivedintensity in region 3 will vary depending upon the translucence of theobject being measured. If the object is opaque, the received lightintensity will be very low, or almost zero (perhaps out of range of thesensing circuitry). If the object is translucent, however, the lightintensity will be quite high, but in general should be less than thepeak value. In region 4, the probe is lifted and the light intensityrises sharply to a maximum value. In region 5, the probe is liftedfurther away from the object, and the light intensity decreases again.

As illustrated, two peak intensity values (discussed as P1 and P2 below)should be detected as the fiber optic pair moves to and from the objectat the peaking height h_(p). If peaks P1 and P2 produced by a receiverfiber optic are the same value, this generally is an indication that theprobe has been moved to and from the surface of the object to bemeasured in a consistent manner. If peaks P1 and P2 are of differentvalues, then these may be an indication that the probe was not moved toand from the surface of the object in a desired manner, or that thesurface is curved or textured, as described more fully herein. In such acase, the data may be considered suspect and rejected. In addition,peaks P1 and P2 for each of the perimeter fiber optics (see, e.g., FIG.2) should occur at the same height (assuming the geometric attributes ofthe perimeter fiber optics, such as aperture, diameter and spacing fromthe source fiber optic, etc.). Thus, the perimeter fiber optics of aprobe moved in a consistent, perpendicular manner to and from thesurface of the object being measured should have peaks P1 and P2 thatoccur at the same height. Monitoring receiver fibers from the perimeterreceiver fiber optics and looking for simultaneous (or nearsimultaneous, e.g., within a predetermined range) peaks P1 and P2provides a mechanism for determining if the probe is held at a desiredperpendicular angle with respect to the object being measured.

In addition, the relative intensity level in region 3 serves as anindication of the level of translucency of the object being measured.Again, such principles generally are applicable to the totality ofreceiver fiber optics in the probe (see, e.g., fibers 7 of FIGS. 1 and3). Based on such principles, measurement techniques that may beapplicable with respect to embodiments disclosed herein will now bedescribed.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart illustrating a general measuring technique thatmay be used in accordance with certain embodiments of the presentinvention. Step 49 indicates the start or beginning of a color/opticalmeasurement. During step 49, any equipment initialization, diagnostic orsetup procedures may be performed. Audio or visual information or otherindicia may be given to the operator to inform the operator that thesystem is available and ready to take a measurement. Initiation of thecolor/optical measurement commences by the operator moving the probetowards the object to be measured, and may be accompanied by, forexample, activation of switch 17 (see FIG. 1).

In step 50, the system on a continuing basis monitors the intensitylevels for the receiver fiber optics (see, e.g., fibers 7 of FIG. 1). Ifthe intensity is rising, step 50 is repeated until a peak is detected.If a peak is detected, the process proceeds to step 52. In step 52,measured peak intensity P1, and the time at which such peak occurred,are stored in memory (such as in memory included as a part ofmicroprocessor 10), and the process proceeds to step 54. In step 54, thesystem continues to monitor the intensity levels of the receiver fiberoptics. If the intensity is falling, step 54 is repeated. If a “valley”or plateau is detected (i.e., the intensity is no longer falling, whichgenerally indicates contact or near contact with the object), then theprocess proceeds to step 56. In step 56, the measured surface intensity(IS) is stored in memory, and the process proceeds to step 58. In step58, the system continues to monitor the intensity levels of the receiverfibers. If the intensity is rising, step 58 is repeated until a peak isdetected. If a peak is detected, the process proceeds to step 60. Instep 60, measured peak intensity P2, and the time at which such peakoccurred, are stored in memory, and the process proceeds to step 62. Instep 62, the system continues to monitor the intensity levels of thereceiver fiber optics. Once the received intensity levels begin to fallfrom peak P2, the system perceives that region 5 has been entered (see,e.g., FIG. 5A), and the process proceeds to step 64.

In step 64, the system, under control of microprocessor 10, may analyzethe collected data taken by the sensing circuitry for the variousreceiver fiber optics. In step 64, peaks P1 and P2 of one or more of thevarious fiber optics may be compared. If any of peaks P1 and P2 for anyof the various receiver fiber optics have unequal peak values, then thedata may be rejected, and the entire color measuring process repeated.Again, unequal values of peaks P1 and P2 may be indicative, for example,that the probe was moved in a non-perpendicular or otherwise unstablemanner (i.e., angular or lateral movement), and, for example, peak P1may be representative of a first point on the object, while peak P2 maybe representative of a second point on the object. As the data issuspect, in a preferred embodiment of the present invention, data takenin such circumstances are rejected in step 64.

If the data are not rejected in step 64, the process proceeds to step66. In step 66, the system analyzes the data taken from theneutral-density-filtered receivers from each of the perimeter fiberoptics (e.g., R1 to R3 of FIG. 2). If the peaks of the perimeter fiberoptics did not occur at or about the same point in time, this may beindicative, for example, that the probe was not held perpendicular tothe surface of the object being measured. As non-perpendicular alignmentof the probe with the surface of the object being measured may causesuspect results, in a preferred embodiment of the present invention,data taken in such circumstances are rejected in step 66. In onepreferred embodiment, detection of simultaneous or near simultaneouspeaking (peaking within a predetermined range of time) serves as anacceptance criterion for the data, as perpendicular alignment generallyis indicated by simultaneous or near simultaneous peaking of theperimeter fiber optics. In other embodiments, step 66 includes ananalysis of peak values P1 and P2 of the perimeter fiber optics. In suchembodiments, the system seeks to determine if the peak values of theperimeter fiber optics (perhaps normalized with any initial calibrationdata) are equal within a defined range. If the peak values of theperimeter fiber optics are within the defined range, the data may beaccepted, and if not, the data may be rejected. In still otherembodiments, a combination of simultaneous peaking and equal valuedetection are used as acceptance/rejection criteria for the data, and/orthe operator may have the ability (such as through key pad switches 12)to control one or more of the acceptance criteria ranges. With suchcapability, the sensitivity of the system may be controllably altered bythe operator depending upon the particular application and operativeenvironment, etc.

If the data are not rejected in step 66, the process proceeds to step68. In step 68, the color data may be processed in a desired manner toproduce output color/optical measurement data. For example, such datamay be normalized in some manner, or adjusted based on temperaturecompensation, or translucency data, or gloss data or surface texturedata or non-perpendicular angle data other data detected by the system.The data also may be converted to different display or other formats,depending on the intended use of the data. In addition, the dataindicative of the translucence of the object and/or glossiness of theobject also may be quantified and/or displayed in step 68. After step68, the process may proceed to starting step 49, or the process may beterminated, etc. As indicated previously, such data also may be comparedwith previously-stored data for purposes of making assessments orpredictions, etc., of a current or future condition or status.

In accordance with the process illustrated in FIG. 6, three lightintensity values (P1, P2 and IS) are stored per receiver fiber optic tomake color and translucency, etc., measurements. If stored peak valuesP1 and P2 are not equal (for some or all of the receivers), this is anindication that the probe was not held steady over one area, and thedata may be rejected (in other embodiments, the data may not berejected, although the resulting data may be used to produce an averageof the measured data). In addition, peak values P1 and P2 for the threeneutral density perimeter fiber optics should be equal or approximatelyequal; if this is not the case, then this is an indication that theprobe was not held perpendicular or a curved surface is being measured.In other embodiments, the system attempts to compensate for curvedsurfaces and/or non-perpendicular angles. In any event, if the systemcannot make a color/optical measurement, or if the data is rejectedbecause peak values P1 and P2 are unequal to an unacceptable degree orfor some other reason, then the operator is notified so that anothermeasurement or other action may be taken (such as adjust thesensitivity).

With a system constructed and operating as described above,color/optical measurements may be taken of an object, with accepted datahaving height and angular dependencies removed. Data not taken at thepeaking height, or data not taken with the probe perpendicular to thesurface of the object being measured, etc., are rejected in certainembodiments. In other embodiments, data received from the perimeterfiber optics may be used to calculate the angle of the probe withrespect to the surface of the object being measured, and in suchembodiments non-perpendicular or curved surface data may be compensatedinstead of rejected. It also should be noted that peak values P1 and P2for the neutral density perimeter fiber optics provide a measurement ofthe luminance (gray value) of the surface of the object being measured,and also may serve to quantify the color value.

The translucency of the object being measured may be quantified as aratio or percentage, such as, for example, (IS/P1)×100%. In otherembodiments, other methods of quantifying translucency data provided inaccordance with the present invention are utilized, such as some otherarithmetic function utilizing IS and P1 or P2, etc. Translucenceinformation, as would be known to those in the art, could be used toquantify and/or adjust the output color data, etc.

In another particular aspect of the present invention, data generated inaccordance with the present invention may be used to implement anautomated material mixing/generation machine and/or method. Certainobjects/materials, such as dental prostheses or fillings, are made fromporcelain or other powders/resins/materials or tissue substitutes thatmay be combined in the correct ratios or modified with additives to formthe desired color of the object/prosthesis. Certain powders oftencontain pigments that generally obey Beer's law and/or act in accordancewith Kubelka-Munk equations and/or Saunderson equations (if needed) whenmixed in a recipe. Color and other data taken from a measurement inaccordance with the present invention may be used to determine orpredict desired quantities of pigment or other materials for the recipe.Porcelain powders and other materials are available in different colors,opacities, etc. Certain objects, such as dental prostheses, may belayered to simulate the degree of translucency of the desired object(such as to simulate a human tooth). Data generated in accordance withthe present invention also may be used to determine the thickness andposition of the porcelain or other material layers to more closelyproduce the desired color, translucency, surface characteristics, etc.In addition, based on fluorescence data for the desired object, thematerial recipe may be adjusted to include a desired quantity offluorescing-type material. In yet other embodiments, surfacecharacteristics (such as texture) information (as more fully describedherein) may be used to add a texturing material to the recipe, all ofwhich may be carried out in accordance with the present invention. Inyet other embodiments, the degree of surface polish to the prosthesismay be monitored or adjusted, based on gloss data derived in accordancewith the present invention.

For more information regarding such pigment-material recipe typetechnology, reference may be made to: “The Measurement of Appearance,”Second Edition, edited by Hunter and Harold, copyright 1987; “Principlesof Color Technology,” by Billmeyer and Saltzman, copyright 1981; and“Pigment Handbook,” edited by Lewis, copyright 1988. All of theforegoing are believed to have been published by John Wiley & Sons,Inc., New York, N.Y., and all of which are hereby incorporated byreference.

In certain operative environments, such as dental applications,contamination of the probe is of concern. In certain embodiments of thepresent invention, implements to reduce such contamination are provided.

FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a protective cap that may be used to fit overthe end of probe tip 1. Such a protective cap consists of body 80, theend of which is covered by optical window 82, which in a preferredembodiment consists of a structure having a thin sapphire window. In apreferred embodiment, body 80 consists of stainless steel. Body 80 fitsover the end of probe tip 1 and may be held into place by, for example,indentations formed in body 80, which fit with ribs 84 (which may be aspring clip or other retainer) formed on probe tip 1. In otherembodiments, other methods of affixing such a protective cap to probetip 1 are utilized. The protective cap may be removed from probe tip 1and sterilized in a typical autoclave, hot steam, chemiclave or othersterilizing system.

The thickness of the sapphire window should be less than the peakingheight of the probe in order to preserve the ability to detect peakingin accordance with the present invention, and preferably has a thicknessless than the critical height at which the source/receiver cones overlap(see FIGS. 4B and 4C). It also is believed that sapphire windows may bemanufactured in a reproducible manner, and thus any light attenuationfrom one cap to another may be reproducible. In addition, any distortionof the color/optical measurements produced by the sapphire window may becalibrated out by microprocessor 10.

Similarly, in other embodiments body 80 has a cap with a hole in thecenter (as opposed to a sapphire window), with the hole positioned overthe fiber optic source/receivers The cap with the hole serves to preventthe probe from coming into contact with the surface, thereby reducingthe risk of contamination. It should be noted that, with suchembodiments, the hole is positioned so that the light from/to the lightsource/receiver elements of the probe tip is not adversely affected bythe cap.

FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate another embodiment of a removable probe tipthat may be used to reduce contamination in accordance with the presentinvention. As illustrated in FIG. 8A, probe tip 88 is removable, andincludes four (or a different number, depending upon the application)fiber optic connectors 90, which are positioned within optical guard 92coupled to connector 94. Optical guard 92 serves to prevent “cross talk”between adjacent fiber optics. As illustrated in FIG. 8B, in thisembodiment removable tip 88 is secured in probe tip housing 93 by way ofspring clip 96 (other removable retaining implements are utilized inother embodiments). Probe tip housing 93 may be secured to baseconnector 95 by a screw or other conventional fitting. It should benoted that, with this embodiment, different size tips may be providedfor different applications, and that an initial step of the process maybe to install the properly-sized (or fitted tip) for the particularapplication. Removable tip 88 also may be sterilized in a typicalautoclave, hot steam, chemiclave or other sterilizing system, ordisposed of. In addition, the entire probe tip assembly is constructedso that it may be readily disassembled for cleaning or repair. Incertain embodiments the light source/receiver elements of the removabletip are constructed of glass, silica or similar materials, therebymaking them particularly suitable for autoclave or similar hightemperature/pressure cleaning methods, which in certain otherembodiments the light source/receiver elements of the removable tip areconstructed of plastic or other similar materials, which may be of lowercost, thereby making them particularly suitable for disposable-typeremovable tips, etc.

In still other embodiments, a plastic, paper or other type shield (whichmay be disposable, cleanable/reusable or the like) may be used in orderto address any contamination concerns that may exist in the particularapplication. In such embodiments, the methodology may includepositioning such a shield over the probe tip prior to takingcolor/optical measurements, and may include removing anddisposing/cleaning the shield after taking color/optical measurements,etc.

A further embodiment of the present invention utilizing an alternateremovable probe tip will now be described with reference to FIGS.23A-23C. As illustrated in FIG. 23A, this embodiment utilizes removable,coherent light conduit 340 as a removable tip. Light conduit 340 is ashort segment of a light conduit that preferably may be a fused bundleof small fiber optics, in which the fibers are held essentially parallelto each other, and the ends of which are highly polished. Cross-section350 of light conduit 340 is illustrated in FIG. 23B. Light conduitssimilar to light conduit 340 have been utilized in what are known asborescopes, and also have been utilized in medical applications such asendoscopes.

Light conduit 340 in this embodiment serves to conduct light from thelight source to the surface of the object being measured, and also toreceive reflected light from the surface and conduct it to lightreceiver fiber optics 346 in probe handle 344. Light conduit 340 is heldin position with respect to fiber optics 346 by way or compression jaws342 or other suitable fitting or coupled that reliably positions lightconduit 340 so as to couple light effectively to/from fiber optics 346.Fiber optics 346 may be separated into separate fibers/light conduits348, which may be coupled to appropriate light sensors, etc., as withpreviously described embodiments.

In general, the aperture of the fiber optics used in light conduit 340may be chosen to match the aperture of the fiber optics for the lightsource and the light receivers or alternately the light conduit aperturecould be greater than or equal to the largest source or receiveraperture. Thus, the central part of the light conduit may conduct lightfrom the light source and illuminate the surface as if it constituted asingle fiber within a bundle of fibers. Similarly, the outer portion ofthe light conduit may receive reflected light and conduct it to lightreceiver fiber optics as if it constituted single fibers. Light conduit340 has ends that preferably are highly polished and cut perpendicular,particularly the end coupling light to fiber optics 346. Similarly, theend of fiber optics 346 abutting light conduit 340 also is highlypolished and cut perpendicular to a high degree of accuracy in order tominimize light reflection and cross talk between the light source fiberoptic and the light receiver fiber optics and between adjacent receiverfiber optics. Light conduit 340 offers significant advantages includingin the manufacture and installation of such a removable tip. Forexample, the probe tip need not be particularly aligned with the probetip holder; rather, it only needs to be held against the probe tipholder such as with a compression mechanism (such as with compressionjaws 342) so as to couple light effectively to/from fiber optics 346.Thus, such a removable tip mechanism may be implemented withoutalignment tabs or the like, thereby facilitating easy installation ofthe removable probe tip. Such an easy installable probe tip may thus beremoved and cleaned prior to installation, thereby facilitating use ofthe color/optical measuring apparatus by dentists, medical professionsor others working in an environment in which contamination may be aconcern. Light conduit 340 also may be implemented, for example, as asmall section of light conduit, which may facilitate easy and low costmass production and the like.

A further embodiment of such a light conduit probe tip is illustrated aslight conduit 352 in FIG. 23C. Light conduit 352 is a light conduit thatis narrower on one end (end 354) than the other end (end 356).Contoured/tapered light conduits such as light conduit 352 may befabricated by heating and stretching a bundle of small fiber optics aspart of the fusing process. Such light conduits have an additionalinteresting property of magnification or reduction. Such phenomenaresult because there are the same number of fibers in both ends. Thus,light entering narrow end 354 is conducted to wider end 356, and sincewider end 356 covers a larger area, it has a magnifying affect.

Light conduit 352 of FIG. 23C may be utilized in a manner similar tolight conduit 340 (which in general may be cylindrical) of FIG. 23A.Light conduit 352, however, measures smaller areas because of itsreduced size at end 354. Thus, a relatively larger probe body may bemanufactured where the source fiber optic is spaced widely from thereceiver fiber optics, which may provide an advantage in reduced lightreflection and cross talk at the junction, while still maintaining asmall probe measuring area. Additionally, the relative sizes of narrowend 354 of light conduit 352 may be varied. This enables the operator toselect the size/characteristic of the removable probe tip according tothe conditions in the particular application. Such ability to selectsizes of probe tips provides a further advantage in making opticalcharacteristics measurements in a variety of applications and operativeenvironments.

As should be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of thedisclosures herein, light conduits 340 and 356 of FIGS. 23A and 23C neednot necessarily be cylindrical/tapered as illustrated, but may be curvedsuch as for specialty applications, in which a curved probe tip may beadvantageously employed (such as in a confined or hard-to-reach place).It also should be apparent that light conduit 352 of FIG. 23C may bereversed (with narrow end 354 coupling light into fiber optics 346,etc., and wide end 356 positioned in order to take measurements) inorder to cover larger areas.

With reference to FIG. 9, a tristimulus embodiment will now bedescribed, which may aid in the understanding of, or may be used inconjunction with, certain embodiments disclosed herein. In general, theoverall system depicted in FIG. 1 and discussed in detail elsewhereherein may be used with this embodiment. FIG. 9 illustrates a crosssection of the probe tip fiber optics used in this embodiment.

Probe tip 100 includes central source fiber optic 106, surrounded by(and spaced apart from) three perimeter receiver fiber optics 104 andthree color receiver fiber optics 102. Three perimeter receiver fiberoptics 104 are optically coupled to neutral density filters and serve asheight/angle sensors in a manner analogous to the embodiment describeabove. Three color receiver fiber optics are optically coupled tosuitable tristimulus filters, such as red, green and blue filters. Withthis embodiment, a measurement may be made of tristimulus color valuesof the object, and the process described with reference to FIG. 6generally is applicable to this embodiment. In particular, perimeterfiber optics 104 may be used to detect simultaneous peaking or otherwisewhether the probe is perpendicular to the object being measured.

FIG. 10A illustrates another such embodiment, similar to the embodimentdiscussed with reference to FIG. 9. Probe tip 100 includes centralsource fiber optic 106, surrounded by (and spaced apart from) threeperimeter receiver fiber optics 104 and a plurality of color receiverfiber optics 102. The number of color receiver fiber optics 102, and thefilters associated with such receiver fiber optics 102, may be chosenbased upon the particular application. As with the embodiment of FIG. 9,the process described with reference to FIG. 6 generally is applicableto this embodiment.

FIG. 10B illustrates another such embodiment in which there are aplurality of receiver fiber optics that surround central source fiberoptic 240. The receiver fiber optics are arranged in rings surroundingthe central source fiber optic. FIG. 10B illustrates three rings ofreceiver fiber optics (consisting of fiber optics 242, 244 and 246,respectively), in which there are six receiver fiber optics per ring.The rings may be arranged in successive larger circles as illustrated tocover the entire area of the end of the probe, with the distance fromeach receiver fiber optic within a given ring to the central fiber opticbeing equal (or approximately so). Central fiber optic 240 is utilizedas the light source fiber optic and is connected to the light source ina manner similar to light source fiber optic 5 illustrated in FIG. 1.

The plurality of receiver fiber optics are each coupled to two or morefiber optics in a manner similar to the arrangement illustrated in FIG.1 for splicing connector 4. One fiber optic from such a splicingconnector for each receiver fiber optic passes through a neutral densityfilter and then to light sensor circuitry similar to the light sensorcircuitry illustrated in FIG. 3. A second fiber optic from the splicingconnector per receiver fiber optic passes through a Sharp CuttingWrattan Gelatin Filter (or notch filter as previously described) andthen to light sensor circuitry as discussed elsewhere herein. Thus, eachof the receiver fiber optics in the probe tip includes both colormeasuring elements and neutral light measuring or “perimeter” elements.

FIG. 10D illustrates the geometry of probe 260 (such as described above)illuminating an area on flat diffuse surface 272. Probe 260 createslight pattern 262 that is reflected diffusely from surface 272 inuniform hemispherical pattern 270. With such a reflection pattern, thereflected light that is incident upon the receiving elements in theprobe will be equal (or nearly equal) for all elements if the probe isperpendicular to the surface as described above herein.

FIG. 10C illustrates a probe illuminating rough surface 268 or a surfacethat reflects light unevenly. The reflected light will exhibit hot spotsor regions 266 where the reflected light intensity is considerablygreater than it is on other areas 264. The reflected light pattern willbe uneven when compared to a smooth surface as illustrate in FIG. 10D.

Since a probe as illustrated in FIG. 10B has a plurality of receiverfiber optics arranged over a large surface area, the probe may beutilized to determine the surface texture of the surface as well asbeing able to measure the color and translucency, etc., of the surfaceas described earlier herein. If the light intensity received by thereceiver fiber optics is equal for all fiber optics within a given ringof receiver fiber optics, then generally the surface is smooth. If,however, the light intensity of receiver fibers in a ring varies withrespect to each other, then generally the surface is rough. By comparingthe light intensities measured within receiver fiber optics in a givenring and from ring to ring, the texture and other characteristics of thesurface may be quantified.

FIG. 11 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention in whichlinear optical sensors and a color gradient filter are utilized insteadof light sensors 8 (and filters 22, etc.). Receiver fiber optics 7,which may be optically coupled to probe tip 1 as with the embodiment ofFIG. 1, are optically coupled to linear optical sensor 112 through colorgradient filter 110. In this embodiment, color gradient filter 110 mayconsist of series of narrow strips of cut-off type filters on atransparent or open substrate, which are constructed so as topositionally correspond to the sensor areas of linear optical sensor112. An example of a commercially available linear optical sensor 112 isTexas Instruments part number TSL213, which has 61 photo diodes in alinear array. Light receiver fiber optics 7 are arranged correspondinglyin a line over linear optical sensor 112. The number of receiver fiberoptics may be chosen for the particular application, so long as enoughare included to more or less evenly cover the full length of colorgradient filter 110. With this embodiment, the light is received andoutput from receiver fiber optics 7, and the light received by linearoptical sensor 112 is integrated for a short period of time (determinedby the light intensity, filter characteristics and desired accuracy).The output of linear array sensor 112 is digitized by ADC 114 and outputto microprocessor 116 (which may the same processor as microprocessor 10or another processor).

In general, with the embodiment of FIG. 11, perimeter receiver fiberoptics may be used as with the embodiment of FIG. 1, and in general theprocess described with reference to FIG. 6 is applicable to thisembodiment.

FIG. 12 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention in which amatrix optical sensor and a color filter grid are utilized instead oflight sensors 8 (and filters 22, etc.). Receiver fiber optics 7, whichmay be optically coupled to probe tip 1 as with the embodiment of FIG.1, are optically coupled to matrix optical sensor 122 through filtergrid 120. Filter grid 120 is a filter array consisting of a number ofsmall colored spot filters that pass narrow bands of visible light.Light from receiver fiber optics 7 pass through corresponding filterspots to corresponding points on matrix optical sensor 122. In thisembodiment, matrix optical sensor 122 may be a monochrome optical sensorarray, such as CCD-type or other type of light sensor element such asmay be used in a video camera. The output of matrix optical sensor 122is digitized by ADC 124 and output to microprocessor 126 (which may thesame processor as microprocessor 10 or another processor). Under controlof microprocessor 126, matrix optical sensor 126 collects data fromreceiver fiber optics 7 through color filter grid 120.

In general, with the embodiment of FIG. 12, perimeter receiver fiberoptics may be used as with the embodiment of FIG. 1, and in general theprocess described with reference to FIG. 6 also is applicable to thisembodiment.

In general with the embodiments of FIGS. 11 and 12, the color filtergrid may consist of sharp cut off filters as described earlier or it mayconsist of notch filters. As will be apparent to one skilled in the art,they may also be constructed of a diffraction grating and focusingmirrors such as those utilized in conventional monochromators.

As will be clear from the foregoing description, with the presentinvention a variety of types of spectral color/optical photometers (ortristimulus-type calorimeters) may be constructed, with perimeterreceiver fiber optics used to collect color/optical data essentiallyfree from height and angular deviations. In addition, in certainembodiments, the present invention enables color/optical measurements tobe taken at a peaking height from the surface of the object beingmeasured, and thus color/optical data may be taken without physicalcontact with the object being measured (in such embodiments, thecolor/optical data is taken only by passing the probe through region 1and into region 2, but without necessarily going into region 3 of FIGS.5A and 5B). Such embodiments may be utilized if contact with the surfaceis undesirable in a particular application. In the embodiments describedearlier, however, physical contact (or near physical contact) of theprobe with the object may allow all five regions of FIGS. 5A and 5B tobe utilized, thereby enabling measurements to be taken such thattranslucency information also may be obtained. Both types of embodimentsgenerally are within the scope of the invention described herein.

Additional description will now be provided with respect to cut-offfilters of the type described in connection with the preferredembodiment(s) of FIGS. 1 and 3 (such as filters 22 of FIG. 3). FIG. 13Aillustrates the properties of a single Kodak Sharp Cutting WrattenGelatin Filter discussed in connection with FIG. 3. Such a cut-offfilter passes light below a cut-off frequency (i.e., above a cut-offwavelength). Such filters may be manufactured to have a wide range ofcut-off frequencies/wavelengths. FIG. 13B illustrates a number of suchfilters, twelve in a preferred embodiment, with cut-offfrequencies/wavelengths chosen so that essentially the entire visibleband is covered by the collection of cut-off filters.

FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate exemplary intensity measurements using acut-off filter arrangement such as illustrated in FIG. 13B, first in thecase of a white surface being measured (FIG. 14A), and also in the caseof a blue surface being measured (FIG. 14B). As illustrated in FIG. 14A,in the case of a white surface, the neutrally filtered perimeter fiberoptics, which are used to detect height and angle, etc., generally willproduce the highest intensity (although this depends at least in partupon the characteristics of the neutral density filters). As a result ofthe stepped cut-off filtering provided by filters having thecharacteristics illustrated in FIG. 13B, the remaining intensities willgradually decrease in value as illustrated in FIG. 14A. In the case of ablue surface, the intensities will decrease in value generally asillustrated in FIG. 14B. Regardless of the surface, however, theintensities out of the filters will always decrease in value asillustrated, with the greatest intensity value being the output of thefilter having the lowest wavelength cut-off value (i.e., passes allvisible light up to blue), and the lowest intensity value being theoutput of the filter having the highest wavelength cut-off (i.e., passesonly red visible light). As will be understood from the foregoingdescription, any color data detected that does not fit the decreasingintensity profiles of FIGS. 14A and 14B may be detected as anabnormality, and in certain embodiments detection of such a conditionresults in data rejection, generation of an error message or initiationof a diagnostic routine, etc.

Reference should be made to the FIGS. 1 and 3 and the relateddescription for a detailed discussion of how such a cut-off filterarrangement may be utilized in accordance with the present invention.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart illustrating audio tones that may be used incertain preferred embodiments of the present invention. It has beendiscovered that audio tones (such as tones, beeps, voice or the likesuch as will be described) present a particularly useful and instructivemeans to guide an operator in the proper use of a color measuring systemof the type described herein.

The operator may initiate a color/optical measurement by activation of aswitch (such as switch 17 of FIG. 1) at step 150. Thereafter, if thesystem is ready (set-up, initialized, calibrated, etc.), alower-the-probe tone is emitted (such as through speaker 16 of FIG. 1)at step 152. The system attempts to detect peak intensity P1 at step154. If a peak is detected, at step 156 a determination is made whetherthe measured peak P1 meets the applicable criteria (such as discussedabove in connection with FIGS. 5A, 4B and 6). If the measured peak P1 isaccepted, a first peak acceptance tone is generated at step 160. If themeasured peak P1 is not accepted, an unsuccessful tone is generated atstep 158, and the system may await the operator to initiate a furthercolor/optical measurement. Assuming that the first peak was accepted,the system attempts to detect peak intensity P2 at step 162. If a secondpeak is detected, at step 164 a determination is made whether themeasured peak P2 meets the applicable criteria. If the measured peak P2is accepted the process proceeds to color calculation step 166 (in otherembodiments, a second peak acceptance tone also is generated at step166). If the measured peak P2 is not accepted, an unsuccessful tone isgenerated at step 158, and the system may await the operator to initiatea further color/optical measurement. Assuming that the second peak wasaccepted, a color/optical calculation is made at step 166 (such as, forexample, microprocessor 10 of FIG. 1 processing the data output fromlight sensors 8, etc.). At step 168, a determination is made whether thecolor calculation meets the applicable criteria. If the colorcalculation is accepted, a successful tone is generated at step 170. Ifthe color calculation is not accepted, an unsuccessful tone is generatedat step 158, and the system may await the operator to initiate a furthercolor/optical measurement.

With unique audio tones presented to an operator in accordance with theparticular operating state of the system, the operator's use of thesystem may be greatly facilitated. Such audio information also tends toincrease operator satisfaction and skill level, as, for example,acceptance tones provide positive and encouraging feedback when thesystem is operated in a desired manner.

The color/optical measuring systems and methods in accordance with thepresent invention may be applied to particular advantage in the field ofdentistry, as will be more fully explained hereinafter. In particularthe present invention includes the use of such systems and methods tomeasure the color and other attributes of a tooth in order to prepare adental prosthesis or intraoral tooth-colored fillings, or to selectdenture teeth or to determine a suitable cement color forporcelain/resin prostheses. The present invention also provides methodsfor storing and organizing measured data such as in the form of apatient database.

FIG. 16A is a flow chart illustrating a general dental applicationprocess flow for use of the color/optical measuring systems and methodsin accordance with the present invention. At step 200, the color/opticalmeasuring system may be powered-up and stabilized, with any requiredinitialization or other setup routines performed. At step 200, anindication of the system status may be provided to the operator, such asthrough LCD 14 or speaker 16 of FIG. 1. Also at step 200, the probe tipmay be shielded or a clean probe tip may be inserted in order to reducethe likelihood of contamination (see, e.g., FIGS. 7A to 8B and relateddescription). In other embodiments, a plastic or other shield may alsobe used (which may be disposable, cleanable/reusable, etc., aspreviously described), so long as it is constructed and/or positioned soas to not adversely affect the measurement process.

At step 202, the patient and the tooth to be measured are prepared. Anyrequired cleaning or other tooth preparation would be performed at step202. Any required patient consultation about the type of prosthesis orarea of a tooth to be matched would be performed at (or before) step202. In certain embodiments, a positioning device is prepared at step202, such as is illustrated in FIGS. 17A and 17B. In such embodiments,for example, a black or other suitably-colored material 282, which mayadhere to tooth 280 (such as with a suitable adhesive), is formed tohave opening 281 larger than the diameter of the measuring probe, withopening 281 centered on the area of tooth 280 to be measured. Thematerial of positioning device 282 is formed in a manner to fit on/overtooth 280 (such as over the incisal edge of tooth 280 and/or over one ormore adjacent teeth) so that it may be placed on/over tooth 280 in arepeatable manner. Such a positioning device may serve to ensure thatthe desired area of tooth 280 is measured, and also allows for repeatmeasurements of the same area for purposes of confirmation, fluorescencemeasurement, or other optical measurement, or the like. Any otherpre-measurement activities may be performed at (or before) step 202.

At step 204, the operator (typically a dentist or other dentalprofessional) moves the probe towards the area of the tooth to bemeasured. This process preferably is conducted in accordance with themethodology described with reference to FIGS. 5A, 5B and 6, andpreferably is accompanied by audio tones such as described withreference to FIG. 15. With the present invention, the operator mayobtain color and translucency data, etc., for example, from a desiredarea of the tooth to be measured. During step 204, an acceptedcolor/optical measurement is made, or some indication is given to theoperator that the measurement step needs to be repeated or some otheraction taken. After an accepted color/optical measurement is made atstep 204, for example, the dentist may operate on the desired tooth orteeth or take other action. Before or after such action, additionalmeasurements may be taken as needed (see, e.g., FIG. 18 and relateddescription).

Upon successful completion of one or more measurements taken at step204, the process proceeds to step 206. At step 206, any data conversionor processing of data collected at step 204 may be performed. Forexample, in the embodiment of FIG. 1, detailed color spectrum andtranslucency information may be generated. In a particular dentalapplication, however, it may be that a dental lab, for example, requiresthat the color be presented in Munsell format (i.e., chroma, hue andvalue), RGB values, XYZ coordinates, CIELAB values, Hunter values, orsome other color data format. With the spectral/color informationproduced by the present invention, data may be converted to such formatsthrough conventional math, for example. Such math may be performed bymicroprocessor 10 or computer 13A of FIG. 1, or in some other manner. Italso should be noted that, in certain embodiments, the data produced atstep 204 in accordance with the present invention may be used directlywithout data conversion. In such embodiments, step 206 may be omitted.In other embodiments, step 206 consists of data formatting, such aspreparing the data for reproduction in hard copy, pictorial or otherform, or for transmission as facsimile or modem data. Finally, incertain embodiments a translucency factor is computed in a formatsuitable for the particular application. In yet other embodiments, asurface texture or detail factor is computed in a format suitable forthe particular application. In yet other embodiments, a surface glossfactor is computed in a format suitable for the particular application.

At step 208, a matching is optionally attempted between the dataproduced at steps 204 and 206 (if performed) and a desired color (inother embodiments, the process may proceed from 204 directly to 210, oralternatively steps 206 and 208 may be combined). For example, a numberof “shade guides” are available in the market, some of which are knownin the industry as Vita shade guides, Bioform shade guides or othercolor matching standards, guides or references or custom shade guides.In certain preferred embodiments, a lookup table is prepared and loadedinto memory (such as memory associated with microprocessor 10 orcomputer 13A of FIG. 1), and an attempt is made to the closest match ormatches of the collected data with the known shade guides, custom shadeguides or reference values. In certain embodiments, a translucencyfactor and/or gloss factor and/or a surface texture or detail factoralso is used in an effort to select the best possible match.

In a particular aspect of certain embodiments of the present invention,at step 208 a material correlation lookup table is accessed. Based onthe color and translucency data obtained at step 204, a proposed recipeof materials, pigments or other instruction information is prepared fora prosthesis or filling, etc., of the desired color and translucency,etc. With the detailed color and other information made available inaccordance with the present invention, a direct correlation with therelevant constituent materials may be made. In still other embodiments,such information is made available to an automated mixing ormanufacturing machine for preparation of prosthesis or material of thedesired color and translucency, etc., as more fully described elsewhereherein.

At step 210, based on the results of the preceding steps, theprosthesis, denture, intraoral tooth-colored filling material or otheritems are prepared. This step may be performed at a dental lab, or, incertain embodiments, at or near the dental operatory. For remotepreparation, relevant data produced at steps 204, 206 and/or 208 may besent to the remote lab or facility by hardcopy, facsimile or modem orother transmission. What should be understood from the foregoing isthat, based on data collected at step 204, a prosthesis may be preparedof a desirable color and/or other optical characteristic at step 210.

At step 212, the prosthesis or other material prepared at step 210 maybe measured for confirmation purposes, again preferably conducted inaccordance with the methodology described with reference to FIGS. 5A, 5Band 6, and preferably accompanied by audio tones such as described withreference to FIG. 15. A re-measure of the tooth in the patient's mouth,etc. also may be made at this step for confirmation purposes. If theconfirmation process gives satisfactory results, the prosthesis,denture, composite filling or other material may be preliminarilyinstalled or applied in the patient at step 214. At step 216, are-measure of the prosthesis, denture, composite filling or othermaterials optionally may be made. If the results of step 216 areacceptable, then the prosthesis may be more permanently installed orapplied in the patient at step 218. If the results of step 216 are notacceptable, the prosthesis may be modified and/or other of the stepsrepeated as necessary in the particular situation.

With reference to FIG. 16B, a further embodiment of the presentinvention will be explained. With this embodiment, an instrument andmethod such as previously described may be advantageously utilized toprepare a tooth to receive a prosthesis.

A dental prosthesis such as a crown or a laminate has optical propertiesthat are determined by a number of factors. Determining factors includethe material of the prosthesis, along with the cement utilized to bondthe prosthesis to the tooth and the underlying optical properties of thetooth itself. For example, in the preparation of a tooth for a laminate,the thickness of the laminate combined with the bonding cement and thecolor of the underlying prepared tooth all contribute to the finaloptical properties of the prosthesis. In order to prepare an optimumprosthesis such as from an esthetic standpoint, the dentist may need toprepare the tooth for the laminate by removing material from the tooth.The final desired esthetic color, shape and contours of the toothdetermines the amount of material needed to be removed from the tooth,which determines the final thickness of the laminate, and in significantpart may determine whether or not the final restoration will have adesired and esthetically pleasing result as compared to neighboringteeth. By measuring the color of the neighboring teeth, and by measuringthe color of the underlying tooth being prepared for the laminate, theamount of tooth material to be removed, or the range of material thatshould be removed, may be determined and reported to the dentist as thetooth is being prepared.

At step 201, the process is commenced. Any initial calibration or otherpreparatory steps may be undertaken. At step 203, the dentist maymeasure the optical properties including color of one or moreneighboring teeth. At step 205, the dentist may measure the opticalproperties including color of the tooth receiving the prosthesis. Atstep 207, a first amount of material to be removed is calculated orestimated (such as by microprocessor 10, computer 13A or other suitablecomputing device). The first amount is determined based on known colorproperties of the available laminates, the estimated thickness of thelaminate, and the color of the tooth to receive the laminate. If, forexample, the tooth to receive the laminate is dark to the degree that anesthetically pleasing laminate likely cannot be produced (based on therange of color/optical characteristics of the known availablelaminates), then an estimate is made of how much material should beremoved such that a thicker laminate will result in a desired andesthetically pleasing result. At step 209 the dentist removes the firstamount of material (or approximately such amount) from the tooth (usingknown removal techniques, etc.). At step 211, the dentist may againmeasure the optical properties including color of the tooth receivingthe prosthesis. At step 213, a calculation or estimation is made (in amanner analogous to step 207) of whether additional material should beremoved, and, if so, how much. At step 215, if needed, additionalmaterial is removed, with steps 211, 213 and 215 repeated as necessary.In preferred embodiments, based on known/measured/empirical dataanalysis of color/optical properties of teeth, at steps such as steps205 and 211, a comparison or assessment may be made of whether the toothbeing prepared is getting too near the pulp (such as by detection of apink color, for example). Based on such threshold or other typecriteria, the dentist may be alerted that further material should not beremoved in order to minimize exposure of the pulp and damage of thetooth. At step 217, if it is determined at step 213 that a desirable andesthetically pleasing laminate may be produced, such laminatepreparation steps are conducted.

Similar steps could be taken in other industrial endeavors, such aspainting or other finishes, etc.

In another particular aspect of the present invention, for example, dataprocessing such as illustrated in FIG. 18 may be taken in conjunctionwith the processes of FIGS. 16A and/or 16B. At step 286, client databasesoftware is run on a computing device, such as computer 13A of FIG. 1.Such software may include data records for each patient, includingfields storing the history of dental services performed on the patient,information regarding the status or condition of the patient's teeth,billing, address and other information. Such software may enter a modeby which it is in condition to accept color or other data taken inaccordance with the present invention.

At step 288, for example, the dentist or other dental professional mayselect parameters for a particular tooth of the patient to be measured.Depending on the size and condition of the tooth (such as color gradientor the like), the dentist may sector the tooth into one or more regions,such as a grid. Thus, for example, in the case of tooth for which it isdecided to take four measurements, the tooth may be sectored into fourregions. Such parameters, which may include a pictorial representationon the computer of the tooth sectored into four regions (such as by gridlines), along with tooth identification and patient information may beentered into the computer at this time.

At step 290, one or more measurements of the tooth may be taken, such aswith a system and method as described in connection with FIGS. 1, 5A, 5Band/or 6. The number of such measurements preferably is associated withthe parameters entered at step 288. Thereafter, at step 292, the datacollected from the measurement(s) may be sent to the computer forsubsequent processing. As an illustrative example, four color/opticalmeasurements may be taken (for the four regions of the tooth in theabove example) and sent to the computer, with the data for the fourcolor/optical measurements (such as RGB or other values) associated withthe four regions in accordance with the entered parameters. Also, as anexample, the displayed pictorial representation of the tooth may haveoverlaid thereof data indicative of the color/optical measurement(s). Atstep 294, such as after completion of color/optical measurements on theparticular patient, the data collected during the process may beassociatively stored as a part of the patient's dental records in thedata base. In embodiments accompanied by use of an intraoral camera, forexample (see, e.g., FIG. 19 and related description), captured images ofone or more of the patient's teeth also may be associatively stored aspart of the patient's dental records. In certain embodiments, a picturecaptured by the intraoral camera is overlaid with grid or sector lines(such as may be defined in step 288), with color or other data measuredas described herein also overlaid over the captured image. In such amanner, the color or other data may be electronically and visuallyassociated with a picture of the particular measured tooth, therebyfacilitating the use of the system and the understanding of thecollected data. In still other embodiments, all such captured image andcolor measurement records include a time and/or date, so that a recordof the particular history of a particular tooth of a particular patientmay be maintained. See FIGS. 24 to 26 and 32 to 34 and relateddescription for additional embodiments utilizing an intraoral camera,etc., in accordance with the present invention.

In yet another particular aspect of the present invention, a measuringdevice and method (such as described elsewhere herein) may be combinedwith an intraoral camera and other implements. As illustrated in FIG.19, control unit 300 contains conventional electronics and circuitry,such as power supplies, control electronics, light sources and the like.Coupled to control unit 300 is intraoral camera 301 (for viewing, andcapturing images of, a patient's tooth or mouth, etc.), curing light 302(such as for curing light-cured intraoral filling material), measuringdevice 304 (such as described elsewhere herein), and visible light 306(which may be an auxiliary light for intraoral examinations and thelike). With such embodiments, color, translucency, fluorescence, gloss,surface texture and/or other data collected for a particular tooth frommeasuring device 304 may be combined with images captured by intraoralcamera 301, with the overall examination and processing of the patientfacilitated by having measuring device 304, intraoral camera 301, curinglight 302 and visible light 306 integrated into a single unit. Suchintegration serves to provide synergistic benefits in the use of theinstruments, while also reducing costs and saving physical space. Inanother particular aspect of such embodiments, the light source formeasuring device 304 and intraoral camera 301 are shared, therebyresulting in additional benefits.

Further embodiments of the present invention will now be described withreference to FIGS. 20 to 23. The previously described embodimentsgenerally rely on movement of the probe with respect to the object/toothbeing measured. While such embodiments provide great utility in manyapplications, in certain applications, such as robotics, industrialcontrol, automated manufacturing, etc. (such as positioning the objectand/or the probe to be in proximity to each other, detectingcolor/optical properties of the object, and then directing the object,e.g., sorting, based on the detected color/optical properties, forfurther industrial processing, packaging, etc.) it may be desired tohave the measurement made with the probe held or positionedsubstantially stationary above the surface of the object to be measured(in such embodiments, the positioned probe may not be handheld as withcertain other embodiments). Such embodiments also may have applicabilityin the field of dentistry (in such applications, “object” generallyrefers to a tooth, etc.).

FIG. 20 illustrates such a further embodiment. The probe of thisembodiment includes a plurality of perimeter sensors and a plurality ofcolor sensors coupled to receivers 312-320. The color sensors andrelated components, etc., may be constructed to operate in a manneranalogous to previously described embodiments. For example, fiber opticcables or the like may couple light from source 310 that is received byreceivers 312-320 to sharp cut-off filters or to notch filters, with thereceived light measured over precisely defined wavelengths (see, e.g.,FIGS. 1, 3 and 11-14 and related description). Color/opticalcharacteristics of the object may be determined from the plurality ofcolor sensor measurements, which may include three such sensors in thecase of a tristimulus instrument, or 8, 12, 15 or more color sensors fora more full bandwidth system (the precise number may be determined bythe desired color resolution, etc.).

With this embodiment, a relatively greater number of perimeter sensorsare utilized (as opposed, for example, to the three perimeter sensorsused in certain preferred embodiments of the present invention). Asillustrated in FIG. 20, a plurality of triads of receivers 312-320coupled to perimeter sensors are utilized, where each triad in thepreferred implementation consists of three fiber optics positioned equaldistance from light source 310, which in the preferred embodiment is acentral light source fiber optic. The triads of perimeterreceivers/sensors may be configured as concentric rings of sensorsaround the central light source fiber optic. In FIG. 20, ten such triadrings are illustrated, although in other embodiments a lesser or greaternumber of triad rings may be utilized, depending upon the desiredaccuracy and range of operation, as well as cost considerations and thelike.

The probe illustrated in FIG. 20 may operate within a range of heights(i.e., distances from the object being measured). As with earlierembodiments, such height characteristics are determined primarily by thegeometry and constituent materials of the probe, with the spacing of theminimal ring of perimeter sensors determining the minimal height, andthe spacing of the maximal ring of perimeter sensors determining themaximum height, etc. It therefore is possible to construct probes ofvarious height ranges and accuracy, etc., by varying the number ofperimeter sensor rings and the range of ring distances from the centralsource fiber optic. It should be noted that such embodiments may beparticularly suitable when measuring similar types of materials, etc.

As described earlier, the light receiver elements for the plurality ofreceivers/perimeter sensors may be individual elements such as TexasInstruments TSL230 light-to-frequency converters, or may be constructedwith rectangular array elements or the like such as may be found in aCCD camera. Other broadband-type of light measuring elements areutilized in other embodiments. Given the large number of perimetersensors used in such embodiments (such as 30 for the embodiment of FIG.16), an array such as CCD camera-type sensing elements may be desirable.It should be noted that the absolute intensity levels of light measuredby the perimeter sensors is not as critical to such embodiments of thepresent invention; in such embodiments differences between the triads ofperimeter light sensors are advantageously utilized in order to obtainoptical measurements.

Optical measurements may be made with such a probe byholding/positioning the probe near the surface of the object beingmeasured (i.e., within the range of acceptable heights of the particularprobe). The light source providing light to light source 310 is turnedon and the reflected light received by receivers 312-320 (coupled to theperimeter sensors) is measured. The light intensity of the rings oftriad sensors is compared. Generally, if the probe is perpendicular tothe surface and if the surface is flat, the light intensity of the threesensors of each triad should be approximately will be equal. If theprobe is not perpendicular to the surface or if the surface is not flat,the light intensity of the three sensors within a triad will not beequal. It is thus possible to determine if the probe is perpendicular tothe surface being measured, etc. It also is possible to compensate fornon-perpendicular surfaces by mathematically adjusting the lightintensity measurements of the color sensors with the variance inmeasurements of the triads of perimeters sensors.

Since the three sensors forming triads of sensors are at differentdistances (radii) from central light source 310, it is expected that thelight intensities measured by light receivers 312-320 and the perimetersensors will vary. For any given triad of sensors, as the probe is movedcloser to the surface, the received light intensity will increase to amaximum and then sharply decrease as the probe is moved closer to thesurface. As with previously-described embodiments, the intensitydecreases rapidly as the probe is moved less than the peaking height anddecreases rapidly to zero or almost zero for opaque objects. The valueof the peaking height depends principally upon the distance of theparticular receiver from light source 310. Thus, the triads of sensorswill peak at different peaking heights. By analyzing the variation inlight values received by the triads of sensors, the height of the probecan be determined. Again, this is particularly true when measuringsimilar types of materials. As discussed earlier, comparisons withpreviously-stored data also may be utilized to made such determinationsor assessments, etc.

The system initially is calibrated against a neutral background (e.g., agray background), and the calibration values are stored in non-volatilememory (see, e.g., processor 10 of FIG. 1). For any given color orintensity, the intensity for the receivers/perimeter sensors(independent of distance from the central source fiber optic) in generalshould vary equally. Hence, a white surface should produce the highestintensities for the perimeter sensors, and a black surface will producethe lowest intensities. Although the color of the surface will affectthe measured light intensities of the perimeter sensors, it shouldaffect them substantially equally. The height of the probe from thesurface of the object, however, will affect the triads of sensorsdifferently. At the minimal height range of the probe, the triad ofsensors in the smallest ring (those closest to the source fiber optic)will be at or about their maximal value. The rest of the rings of triadswill be measuring light at intensities lower than their maximal values.As the probe is raised/positioned from the minimal height, the intensityof the smallest ring of sensors will decrease and the intensity of thenext ring of sensors will increase to a maximal value and will thendecrease in intensity as the probe is raised/positioned still further.Similarly for the third ring, fourth ring and so on. Thus, the patternof intensities measured by the rings of triads will be height dependent.In such embodiments, characteristics of this pattern may be measured andstored in non-volatile RAM look-up tables (or the like) for the probe bycalibrating it in a fixture using a neutral color surface. Again, theactual intensity of light is not as important in such embodiments, butthe degree of variance from one ring of perimeter sensors to another is.

To determine a measure of the height of the probe from the surface beingmeasured, the intensities of the perimeter sensors (coupled to receivers312-320) is measured. The variance in light intensity from the innerring of perimeter sensors to the next ring and so on is analyzed andcompared to the values in the look-up table to determine the height ofthe probe. The determined height of the probe with respect to thesurface thus may be utilized by the system processor to compensate forthe light intensities measured by the color sensors in order to obtainreflectivity readings that are in general independent of height. As withpreviously described embodiments, the reflectivity measurements may thenbe used to determine optical characteristics of the object beingmeasured, etc.

It should be noted that audio tones, such as previously described, maybe advantageously employed when such an embodiment is used in a handheldconfiguration. For example, audio tones of varying pulses, frequenciesand/or intensities may be employed to indicate the operational status ofthe instrument, when the instrument is positioned within an acceptablerange for color measurements, when valid or invalid color measurementshave been taken, etc. In general, audio tones as previously describedmay be adapted for advantageous use with such further embodiments.

FIG. 21 illustrates a further such embodiment of the present invention.The preferred implementation of this embodiment consists of a centrallight source 310 (which in the preferred implementation is a centrallight source fiber optic), surrounded by a plurality of light receivers322 (which in the preferred implementation consists of three perimeterlight receiver fiber optics). The three perimeter light receiver fiberoptics, as with earlier described embodiments, may be each spliced intoadditional fiber optics that pass to light intensity receivers/sensors,which may be implemented with Texas Instruments TSL230 light tofrequency converters as described previously. One fiber of eachperimeter receiver is coupled to a sensor and measured full band width(or over substantially the same bandwidth) such as via a neutral densityfilter, and other of the fibers of the perimeter receivers are coupledto sensors so that the light passes through sharp cut off or notchfilters to measure the light intensity over distinct frequency ranges oflight (again, as with earlier described embodiments). Thus, there arecolor light sensors and neutral “perimeter” sensors as with previouslydescribed embodiments. The color sensors are utilized to determine thecolor or other optical characteristics of the object, and the perimetersensors are utilized to determine if the probe is perpendicular to thesurface and/or are utilized to compensate for non-perpendicular angleswithin certain angular ranges.

In the embodiment of FIG. 21, the angle of the perimeter sensor fiberoptics is mechanically varied with respect to the central source fiberoptic. The angle of the perimeter receivers/sensors with respect to thecentral source fiber optic is measured and utilized as describedhereinafter. An exemplary mechanical mechanism, the details of which arenot critical so long as desired, control movement of the perimeterreceivers with respect to the light source is obtained, is describedwith reference to FIG. 22.

The probe is held within the useful range of the instrument (determinedby the particular configuration and construction, etc.), and a colormeasurement is initiated. The angle of the perimeter receivers/sensorswith respect to the central light source is varied from parallel topointing towards the central source fiber optic. While the angle isbeing varied, the intensities of the light sensors for the perimetersensors (e.g., neutral sensors) and the color sensors is measured andsaved along with the angle of the sensors at the time of the lightmeasurement. The light intensities are measured over a range of angles.As the angle is increased the light intensity will increase to a maximumvalue and will then decrease as the angle is further increased. Theangle where the light values is a maximum is utilized to determine theheight of the probe from the surface. As will be apparent to thoseskilled in the art based on the teachings provided herein, with suitablecalibration data, simple geometry or other math, etc., may be utilizedto calculate the height based on the data measured during variation ofthe angle. The height measurement may then be utilized to compensate forthe intensity of the color/optical measurements and/or utilized tonormalize color values, etc.

FIG. 22 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a mechanical arrangementto adjust and measure the angle of the perimeter sensors. Each perimeterreceiver/sensor 322 is mounted with pivot arm 326 on probe frame 328.Pivot arm 326 engages central ring 332 in a manner to form a cammechanism. Central ring 332 includes a groove that holds a portion ofpivot arm 326 to form the cam mechanism. Central ring 332 may be movedperpendicular with respect to probe frame 328 via linear actuator 324and threaded spindle 330. The position of central ring 332 with respectto linear actuator 324 determines the angle of perimeterreceivers/sensors 322 with respect to light source 310. Such angularposition data vis-á-vis the position of linear actuator 324 may becalibrated in advance and stored in non-volatile memory, and later usedto produce color/optical characteristic measurement data as previouslydescribed.

Referring now to FIG. 24, a further embodiment of the present inventionwill be explained.

Intraoral reflectometer 380, which may be constructed as describedabove, includes probe 381. Data output from reflectometer 380 is coupledto computer 384 over bus 390 (which may be a standard serial or parallelbus, etc.). Computer 384 includes a video freeze frame capability andpreferably a modem. Intraoral camera 382 includes handpiece 383 andcouples video data to computer 384 over bus 392. Computer 384 is coupledto remote computer 386 over telecommunication channel 388, which may bea standard telephone line, ISDN line, a LAN or WAN connection, etc. Withsuch an embodiment, video measurements may be taken of one or more teethby intraoral camera 382, along with optical measurements taken byintraoral reflectometer 380. Computer 384 may store still picture imagestaken from the output of intraoral camera 382.

Teeth are known to have variations in color from tooth to tooth, andteeth are known to have variations in color over the area of one tooth.Intraoral cameras are known to be useful for showing the details ofteeth. Intraoral cameras, however, in general have poor colorreproducibility. This is due to variations in the camera sensingelements (from camera to camera and over time etc.), in computermonitors, printers, etc. As a result of such variations, it presently isnot possible to accurately quantify the color of a tooth with anintraoral camera. With the present embodiment, measuring and quantifyingthe color or other optical properties of teeth may be simplified throughthe use of an intraoral reflectometer in accordance with the presentinvention, along with an intraoral camera.

In accordance with this embodiment, the dentist may capture a stillpicture of a tooth and its adjacent teeth using the freeze frame featureof computer 384. Computer 384, under appropriate software and operatorcontrol, may then “postureize” the image of the tooth and its adjacentteeth, such as by limiting the number of gray levels of the luminancesignal, which can result in a color image that shows contours ofadjacent color boundaries. As illustrated in FIG. 25, such apostureization process may result in teeth 396 being divided intoregions 398, which follow color contours of teeth 396. As illustrated,in general the boundaries will be irregular in shape and follow thevarious color variations found on particular teeth.

With teeth postureized as illustrated in FIG. 25, computer 384 may thenhighlight (such as with a colored border, shading, highlight or thelike) a particular color region on a tooth to be measured, and then thedentist may then measure the highlighted region with intraoralreflectometer 380. The output of intraoral reflectometer 380 is input tocomputer 384 over bus 390, and computer 384 may store in memory or on ahard disk or other storage medium the color/optical data associated withthe highlighted region. Computer 384 may then highlight another regionand continue the process until color/optical data associated with alldesired highlighted regions have been stored in computer 384. Suchcolor/optical data may then be stored in a suitable data base, alongwith the video image and postureized video image of the particularteeth, etc.

Computer 384 may then assess if the measured value of a particular colorregion is consistent with color measurements for adjacent color regions.If, for example, a color/optical measurement for one region indicates adarker region as compared to an adjacent region, but the postureizedimage indicates that the reverse should be true, then computer 384 maynotify the dentist (such as with an audio tone) that one or more regionsshould be re-measured with intraoral reflectometer 380. Computer 384 maymake such relative color determinations (even though the color valuesstored in computer 384 from the freeze frame process are not true colorvalues) because the variations from region to region should follow thesame pattern as the color/optical measurements taken by intraoralreflectometer 380. Thus, if one region is darker than its neighbors,then computer 384 will expect that the color measurement data fromintraoral reflectometer 380 for the one region also will be darkerrelative to color measurement data for the neighboring regions, etc.

As with the optical characteristics measurement data and captured imagesdiscussed previously, the postureized image of the teeth, along with thecolor/optical measurement data for the various regions of the teeth, maybe conveniently stored, maintained and accessed as part of the patientdental records. Such stored data may be utilized advantageously increating dental prosthesis that more correctly match the colors/regionsof adjacent teeth. Additionally, in certain embodiments, such dataimages are used in conjunction with smile analysis software to furtheraid in the prosthesis preparation.

In a further refinement to the foregoing embodiment, computer 384preferably has included therein, or coupled thereto, a modem. With sucha modem capability (which may be hardware or software), computer 384 maycouple data to remote computer 386 over telecommunication channel 388.For example, remote computer 386 may be located at a dental laboratoryremotely located. Video images captured using intraoral camera 382 andcolor/optical data collected using intraoral reflectometer may betransmitted to a dental technician (for example) at the remote location,who may use such images and data to construct dental prosthesis.Additionally, computer 384 and remote computer 386 may be equipped withan internal or external video teleconference capability, therebyenabling a dentist and a dental technician or ceramist, etc., to have alive video or audio teleconference while viewing such images and/ordata.

For example, a live teleconference could take place, whereby the dentaltechnician or ceramist views video images captured using intraoralcamera 383, and after viewing images of the patient's teeth and facialfeatures and complexion, etc., instruct the dentist as to which areas ofthe patient's teeth are recommended for measurement using intraoralreflectometer 380. Such interaction between the dentist and dentaltechnician or ceramist may occur with or without postureization aspreviously described. Such interaction may be especially desirable at,for example, a try-in phase of a dental prosthesis, when minor changesor subtle characterizations may be needed in order to modify theprosthesis for optimum esthetic results.

A still further refinement may be understood with reference to FIG. 26.As illustrated in FIG. 26, color calibration chart 404 could be utilizedin combination with various elements of the previously describedembodiments, including intraoral camera 382. Color calibration chart 404may provide a chart of known color values, which may be employed, forexample, in the video image to further enhance correct skin tones ofpatient 402 in the displayed video image. As the patient's gingivaltissue, complexion and facial features, etc., may influence the finalesthetic results of a dental prosthesis, such a color calibration chartmay be desirably utilized to provide better esthetic results.

As an additional example, such a color calibration chart may be utilizedby computer 384 and/or 386 to “calibrate” the color data within acaptured image to true or known color values. For example, colorcalibration chart 404 may include one or more orientation markings 406,which may enable computers 384 and/or 386 to find and position colorcalibration chart 404 within a video frame. Thereafter, computers 384and/or 386 may then compare “known” color data values from colorcalibration chart (data indicative of the colors within colorcalibration chart 404 and their position relative to orientation mark ormarkings 406 are stored within computers 384 and/or 386, such as in alookup table, etc.) with the colors captured within the video image atpositions corresponding to the various colors of color calibration chart404. Based on such comparisons, computers 384 and/or 386 may coloradjust the video image in order to bring about a closer correspondencebetween the colors of the video image and known or true colors fromcolor calibration chart 404.

In certain embodiments, such color adjusted video data may be used inthe prosthesis preparation process, such as to color adjust the videoimage (whether or not postureized) in conjunction with color/opticaldata collected using intraoral reflectometer 380 (for example, asdescribed above or using data from intraoral reflectometer 380 tofurther color adjust portions of the video image), or to add subtlecharacterizations or modifications to a dental prosthesis, or to evenprepare a dental prosthesis, etc. While not believed to be as accurate,etc. as color/optical data collected using intraoral reflectometer 380,such color adjusted video data may be adequate in certain applications,environments, situations, etc., and such color adjusted video data maybe utilized in a similar manner to color data taken by a device such asintraoral reflectometer 380, including, for example, prosthesispreparation, patient data collection and storage, materials preparation,such as described elsewhere herein.

It should be further noted that color calibration chart 404 may bespecifically adapted (size, form and constituent materials, etc.) to bepositioned inside of the patient's mouth to be placed near the tooth orteeth being examined, so as to be subject to the same or nearly the sameambient lighting and environmental conditions, etc., as is the tooth orteeth being examined. It also should further be noted that theutilization of color calibration chart 404 to color correct video imagedata with a computer as provided herein also may be adapted to be usedin other fields, such as medical, industrial, etc., although its noveland advantageous use in the field of dentistry as described herein is ofparticular note and emphasis herein.

FIG. 27 illustrates a further embodiment of the present invention, inwhich an intraoral reflectometer in accordance with the presentinvention may be adapted to be mounted on, or removably affixed to, adental chair. An exemplary dental chair arrangement in accordance withthe present invention includes dental chair 410 is mounted on base 412,and may include typical accompaniments for such chairs, such as footcontrol 414, hose(s) 416 (for suction or water, etc.), cuspidor andwater supply 420 and light 418. A preferably movable arm 422 extends outfrom support 428 in order to provide a conveniently locatable support430 on which various dental instruments 424 are mounted or affixed in aremovable manner. Bracket table 426 also may be included, on which adentist may position other instruments or materials. In accordance withthis embodiment, however, instruments 424 include an intraoralreflectometer in accordance with the present invention, which isconveniently positioned and removably mounted/affixed on support 430, sothat color/optical measurements, data collection and storage andprosthesis preparation may be conveniently carried out by the dentist.As opposed to large and bulky prior art instruments, the presentinvention enables an intraoral reflectometer for collectingcolor/optical data, in some embodiments combined or utilized with anintraoral camera as described elsewhere herein, which may be readilyadapted to be positioned in a convenient location on a dental chair.Such a dental chair also may be readily adapted to hold otherinstruments, such as intraoral cameras, combined intraoralcamera/reflectors, drills, lights, etc.

With the foregoing as background, various additional preferredembodiments utilizing variable aperture receivers in order to measure,for example, the degree of gloss of the surface will now be describedwith references to FIGS. 28A to 30B. Various of the electronics andspectrophotometer/reflectometer implements described above will beapplicable to such preferred embodiments.

Referring to FIG. 28A, a probe utilizing variable aperture receiverswill now be described. In FIG. 28A, source A 452 represents a sourcefiber optic of a small numerical aperture NA, 0.25 for example;receivers B 454 represent receiver fiber optics of a wider numericalaperture, 0.5 for example; receivers C 456 represent receiver fiberoptics of the same numerical aperture as source A but is shown with asmaller core diameter; and receivers D 458 represent receiver fiberoptics of a wider numerical aperture, 0.5 for example.

One or more of receiver(s) B 454 (in certain embodiments one receiver Bmay be utilized, while in other embodiments a plurality of receivers Bare utilized, which may be circularly arranged around source A, such as6 or 8 such receivers B) pass to a spectrometer (see, e.g., FIGS. 1, 3,11, 12, configured as appropriate for such preferred embodiments).Receiver(s) B 454 are used to measure the spectrum of the reflectedlight. Receivers C 456 and D 458 pass to broad band (wavelength) opticalreceivers and are used to correct the measurement made by receiver(s) B.Receivers C 456 and D 458 are used to correct for and to detect whetheror not the probe is perpendicular to the surface and to measure/assessthe degree of specular versus diffuse reflection (the coefficient ofspecular reflection, etc.) and to measure the translucency of thematerial/object.

FIG. 28B illustrates a refinement of the embodiment of FIG. 28A, inwhich receivers B 454 are replaced by a cylindrical arrangement ofclosely packed, fine optical fibers 454A, which generally surround lightsource 452 as illustrated. The fibers forming the cylindricalarrangement for receivers B 454, are divided into smaller groups offibers and are presented, for example, to light sensors 8 shown in FIG.1. The number of groups of fibers is determined by the number of lightsensors. Alternately, the entire bundle of receiver fibers B 454 ispresented to a spectrometer such as a diffraction grating spectrometerof conventional design. As previously described, receivers C 456 and D458 may be arranged on the periphery thereof. In certain embodiments,receivers C and D may also consist of bundles of closely packed, fineoptical fibers. In other embodiments they consist of single fiberoptics.

The assessment of translucency in accordance with embodiments of thepresent invention have already been described. It should be noted,however, that in accordance with the preferred embodiment both the lightreflected from the surface of the material/object (i.e., the peakingintensity) and its associated spectrum and the spectrum of the lightwhen it is in contact with the surface of the material/object may bemeasured/assessed. The two spectrums typically will differ in amplitude(the intensity or luminance typically will be greater above the surfacethan in contact with the surface) and the spectrums for certainmaterials may differ in chrominance (i.e., the structure of thespectrum) as well.

When a probe in accordance with such embodiments measures the peakingintensity, it in general is measuring both the light reflected from thesurface and light that penetrates the surface, gets bulk scatteredwithin the material and re-emerges from the material (e.g., the resultof translucency). When the probe is in contact with the surface (e.g.,less than the critical height), no light reflecting from the surface canbe detected by the receiver fiber optics, and thus any light detected bythe receivers is a result of the translucency of the material and itsspectrum is the result of scattering within the bulk of the material.The “reflected spectrum” and the “bulk spectrum” in general may bedifferent for different materials, and assessments of such reflected andbulk spectrum provide additional parameters for measuring, assessingand/or characterizing materials, surfaces, objects, teeth, etc., andprovide new mechanisms to distinguish translucent and other types ofmaterials.

In accordance with preferred embodiments of the present invention, anassessment or measurement of the degree of gloss (or specularreflection) may be made. For understanding thereof, reference is made toFIGS. 29 to 30B.

Referring to FIG. 29, consider two fiber optics, source fiber optic 460and receiver fiber optic 462, arranged perpendicular to a specularsurface as illustrated. The light reflecting from a purely specularsurface will be reflected in the form of a cone. As long as thenumerical aperture of the receiver fiber optic is greater than or equalto the numerical aperture of the source fiber optic, all the lightreflected from the surface that strikes the receiver fiber optic will bewithin the receiver fiber optic's acceptance cone and will be detected.In general, it does not matter what the numerical aperture of thereceiver fiber optic is, so long as it is greater than or equal to thenumerical aperture of the source fiber optic. When the fiber optic pairis far from the surface, receiver fiber optic 462 is fully illuminated.Eventually, as the pair approaches surface 464, receiver fiber optic 462is only partially illuminated. Eventually, at heights less than or equalto the critical height h_(c) receiver fiber optic 462 will not beilluminated. In general, such as for purely specular surfaces, it shouldbe noted that the critical height is a function of the numericalaperture of source fiber optic 460, and is not a function of thenumerical aperture of the receiver.

Referring now to FIGS. 30A and 30B, consider two fiber optics (source460 and receiver 462) perpendicular to diffuse surface 464A asillustrated in FIG. 30A (FIG. 30B depicts mixed specular/diffuse surface464B and area of intersection 466B). Source fiber optic 460 illuminatescircular area 466A on surface 464A, and the light is reflected fromsurface 464A. The light, however, will be reflected at all angles,unlike a specular surface where the light will only be reflected in theform of a cone. Receiver fiber optic 462 in general is alwaysilluminated at all heights, although it can only propagate and detectlight that strikes its surface at an angle less than or equal to itsacceptance angle. Thus, when the fiber optic pair is less than thecritical height, receiver fiber optic 462 detects no light. As theheight increases above the critical height, receiver fiber optic 462starts to detect light that originates from the area of intersection ofthe source and receiver cones as illustrated. Although light may beincident upon receiver fiber optic 462 from other areas of theilluminated circle, it is not detected because it is greater than theacceptance angle of the receiver fiber.

As the numerical aperture of receiver fiber optic 462 increases, theintensity detected by receiver fiber optic 462 will increase for diffusesurfaces, unlike a specular surface where the received intensity is nota function of receiver fiber optic numerical aperture. Thus, for a probeconstructed with a plurality of receiver fiber optics with differentnumerical apertures, as in preferred embodiments of the presentinvention, if the surface is a highly glossy surface, both receivers(see, e.g., receivers 456 and 458 of FIG. 28A, will measure the samelight intensity. As the surface becomes increasingly diffuse, howeverreceiver D 458 will have a greater intensity than receiver C 456. Theratio of the two intensities from receivers C/D is a measure of, orcorrelates to, the degree of specular reflection of the material, andmay be directly or indirectly used to quantify the “glossiness” of thesurface. Additionally, it should be noted that generally receiver C 456(preferably having the same numerical aperture as source fiber optic A452) measures principally the specular reflected component. Receiver D458, on the other hand, generally measures both diffuse and specularcomponents. As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, suchprobes and methods utilizing receivers of different/varying numericalapertures may be advantageously utilized, with or without additionaloptical characteristic determinations as described elsewhere herein, tofurther quantify materials such as teeth or other objects.

Referring now to FIG. 31A, additional preferred embodiments will bedescribed. The embodiment of FIG. 31A utilizes very narrow numericalaperture, non-parallel fiber optic receivers 472 and very narrownumerical aperture source fiber optic 470 or utilizes other opticalelements to create collimated or nearly collimated source and receiverelements. Central source fiber optic 470 is a narrow numerical aperturefiber optic and receiver fiber optics 472 as illustrated (preferablymore than two such receivers are utilized in such embodiments) are alsonarrow fiber optics. Other receiver fiber optics may be wide numericalaperture fiber optics (e.g., receivers such as receivers 458 of FIG.28A). As illustrated, receiver fiber optics 472 of such embodiments areat an angle with respect to source fiber optic 470, with the numericalaperture of the receiver fiber optics selected such that, when thereceived intensity peaks as the probe is lowered to the surface, thereceiver fiber optics' acceptance cones intersect with the entirecircular area illuminated by the source fiber optic, or at least with asubstantial portion of the area illuminated by the source. Thus, thereceivers generally are measuring the same central spot illuminated bythe source fiber optic.

A particular aspect of such embodiments is that a specular excludedprobe/measurement technique may be provided. In general, the spectrallyreflected light is not incident upon the receiver fiber optics, and thusthe probe is only sensitive to diffuse light. Such embodiments may beuseful for coupling reflected light to a multi-band spectrometer (suchas described previously) or to more wide band sensors. Additionally,such embodiments may be useful as a part of a probe/measurementtechnique utilizing both specular included and specular excludedsensors. An illustrative arrangement utilizing such an arrangement isshown in FIG. 31B. In FIG. 31B, element 470 may consist of a sourcefiber optic, or alternatively may consist of all or part of the elementsshown in cross-section in FIG. 28A or 28B. Still alternatively,non-parallel receiver fiber optics 472 may be parallel along theirlength but have a machined, polished, or other finished or other bentsurface on the end thereof in order to exclude all, or a substantial orsignificant portion, of the specularly reflected light. In otherembodiments, receiver fiber optics 472 may contain optical elementswhich exclude specularly reflected light. An additional aspect ofembodiments of the present invention is that they may be more fullyintegrated with an intraoral camera.

Referring now to FIGS. 32 to 34, various of such embodiments will bedescribed for illustrative purposes. In such embodiments, opticalcharacteristic measurement implements such as previously described maybe more closely integrated with an intraoral camera, including commonchassis 480, common cord or cable 482, and common probe 484. In one suchalternative preferred embodiment, camera optics 486 are positionedadjacent to spectrometer optics 488 near the end of probe 484, such asillustrated in FIG. 33. Spectrometer optics 488 may incorporate, forexample, elements of color and other optical characteristics measuringembodiments described elsewhere herein, such as shown in FIGS. 1-3,9-10B, 11-12, 20-21, 28A, 28B and 31A and 31B. In another embodiment,camera optics and lamp/light source 490 is positioned near the end ofprobe 484, around which are positioned a plurality of light receivers492. Camera optics and lamp/light source 490 provide illumination andoptics for the camera sensing element and a light source for makingcolor/optical characteristics in accordance with techniques describedelsewhere herein. It should be noted that light receivers 492 are shownas a single ring for illustrative purposes, although in otherembodiments light receivers such as described elsewhere herein (such asin the above-listed embodiments including multiple rings/groups, etc.)may be utilized in an analogous manner. Principles of such camera opticsgenerally are known in the borescope or endoscopes fields.

With respect to such embodiments, one instrument may be utilized forboth intraoral camera uses and for quantifying the optical properties ofteeth. The intraoral camera may be utilized for showing patients thegeneral state of the tooth, teeth or other dental health, or formeasuring certain properties of teeth or dental structure such as sizeand esthetics or for color postureization as previously described. Theoptical characteristic measuring implement may then measure the opticalproperties of the teeth such as previously described herein. In certainembodiments, such as illustrated in FIGS. 33 and 34, a protective shieldis placed over the camera for intraoral use in a conventional manner,and the protective shield is removed and a specialized tip is insertedinto spectrometer optics 488 or over camera optics and lamp/light source490 and light receivers 492 (such tips may be as discussed in connectionwith FIGS. 23A-23C, with a suitable securing mechanism) for infectioncontrol, thereby facilitating measuring and quantifying the opticalproperties. In other embodiments a common protective shield (preferablythin and tightly fitted, and optically transparent, such as are knownfor intraoral cameras) that covers both the camera portion andspectrometer portion are utilized.

Based on the foregoing embodiments, with which translucency and glossmay be measured or assessed, further aspects of the present inventionwill be described. As previously discussed, when light strikes anobject, it may be reflected from the surface, absorbed by the bulk ofthe material, or it may penetrate into the material and either beemitted from the surface or pass entirely through the material (i.e.,the result of translucency). Light reflected from the surface may beeither reflected specularly (i.e., the angle of reflection equals theangle of incidence), or it may be reflected diffusely (i.e., light maybe reflected at any angle). When light is reflected from a specularsurface, the reflected light tends to be concentrated. When it isreflected from a diffuse surface, the light tends to be distributed overan entire solid hemisphere (assuming the surface is planar) (see, e.g.,FIGS. 29-30B). Accordingly, if the receivers of such embodiments measureonly diffusely reflected light, the light spectrum (integrated spectrumor gray scale) will be less than an instrument that measures both thespecular and diffusely reflected light. Instruments that measure boththe specular and diffuse components may be referred to as “specularincluded” instruments, while those that measure only the diffusecomponent may be referred to as “specular excluded.”

An instrument that can distinguish and quantify the degree of gloss orthe ratio of specular to diffusely reflected light, such as withembodiments previously described, may be utilized in accordance with thepresent invention to correct and/or normalize a measured color spectrumto that of a standardized surface of the same color, such as a purelydiffuse or Lambertian surface. As will be apparent to one of skill inthe art, this may be done, for example, by utilizing the glossmeasurement to reduce the value or luminance of the color spectrum (theoverall intensity of the spectrum) to that of the perfectly diffusematerial.

A material that is translucent, on the other hand, tends to lower theintensity of the color spectrum of light reflected from the surface ofthe material. Thus, when measuring the color of a translucent material,the measured spectrum may appear darker than a similar colored materialthat is opaque. With translucency measurements made as previouslydescribed, such translucency measurements may be used to adjust themeasured color spectrum to that of a similar colored material that isopaque. As will be understood, in accordance with the present inventionthe measured color spectrum may be adjusted, corrected or normalizedbased on such gloss and/or translucency data, with the resulting datautilized, for example, for prosthesis preparation or other industrialutilization as described elsewhere herein.

Additional aspects of the present invention relating to the output ofoptical properties to a dental laboratory for prosthesis preparationwill now be described. There are many methods for quantifying color,including CIELab notation, Munsell notation, shade tab values, etc.Typically, the color of a tooth is reported by a dentist to the lab inthe form of a shade tab value. The nomenclature of the shade tab or itsvalue is an arbitrary number assigned to a particular standardized shadeguide. Dentists typically obtain the shade tabs from shade tabsuppliers. The labs utilize the shade tabs values in porcelain recipesto obtain the final color of the dental prosthesis.

Unfortunately, however, there are variances in the color of shade tabs,and there are variances in the color of batches of dental prosthesisceramics or other materials. Thus, there are variances in theceramics/material recipes to obtain a final color of a tooth resultingin a prosthesis that does not match the neighboring teeth.

In accordance with the present invention, such problems may be addressedas follows. A dental lab may receive a new batch of ceramic materialsand produce a test batch of materials covering desired color,translucency and/or gloss range(s). The test materials may then bemeasured, with values assigned to the test materials. The values andassociated color, translucency and gloss and other optical propertiesmay then be saved and stored, including into the dental instruments thatthe lab services (such as by modem download). Thereafter, when a dentistmeasures the optical properties of a patient's tooth, the output valuesfor the optical properties may be reported to the lab in a formula thatis directly related, or more desirably correlated, to the materials thatthe lab will utilize in order to prepare the prosthesis. Additionally,such functionality may enable the use of “virtual shade guides” or otherdata for customizing or configuring the instrument for the particularapplication.

Still other aspects of the present invention will be described withreference to FIGS. 35 and 36, which illustrate a cordless embodiment ofthe present invention. Cordless unit 500 includes a housing on which ismounted display 502 for display of color/optical property data or statusor other information. Keypad 504 is provided to input various commandsor information. Unit 500 also may be provided with control switch 510for initiating measurements or the like, along with speaker 512 foraudio feedback (such as previously described), wireless infrared serialtransceiver for wireless data transmission such as to an intelligentcharging stand (as hereinafter described) and/or to a host computer orthe like, battery compartment 516, serial port socket 518 (forconventional serial communications to an intelligent charging standand/or host computer, and/or battery recharging port 520. Unit 500includes probe 506, which in preferred embodiments may include removabletip 508 (such as previously described). Of course, unit 500 may containelements of the various embodiments as previously described herein.

Charging stand 526 preferably includes socket/holder 532 for holdingunit 500 while it is being recharged, and preferably includes a socketto connect to wired serial port 518, wireless IR serial transceiver 530,wired serial port 524 (such as an RS232 port) for connection to a hostcomputer (such as previously described), power cable 522 for providingexternal power to the system, and lamps 528 showing the charging stateof the battery and/or other status information or the like.

The system battery may be charged in charging stand 526 in aconventional manner. A charging indicator (such as lamps 528) may beused to provide an indication of the state of the internal battery. Unit500 may be removed from the stand, and an optical measurement may bemade by the dentist. If the dentist chooses, the optical measurement maybe read from display 502, and a prescription may be handwritten orotherwise prepared by the dentist. Alternately, the color/opticalcharacteristics data may be transmitted by wireless IR transceiver 514(or other cordless system such as RF) to a wireless transceiver, such astransceiver 530 of charging stand 526. The prescription may then beelectronically created based upon the color/optical characteristicsdata. The electronic prescription may be sent from serial port 524 to acomputer or modem or other communications channel to the dentallaboratory.

With reference to FIGS. 37A and 37B, additional aspects of the presentinvention will be discussed.

As is known, human teeth consist of an inner, generally opaque, dentinlayer, and an outer, generally translucent, enamel layer. As previouslydiscussed, light that is incident on a tooth generally can be affectedby the tooth in three ways. First, the light can be reflected from theouter surface of the tooth, either diffusely or specularly. Second, thelight can be internally scattered and absorbed by the tooth structures.Third, the light can be internally scattered and transmitted through thetooth structures and re-emerge from the surface of the tooth.Traditionally, it was difficult, if not impossible, to distinguish lightreflected from the surface of the tooth, whether specularly ordiffusely, from light that has penetrated the tooth, been scatteredinternally and re-emitted from the tooth. In accordance with the presentinvention, however, a differentiation may be made between light that isreflected from the surface of the tooth and light that is internallyscattered and re-emitted from the tooth.

As previously described, a critical height h_(c) occurs when a pair offiber optics serve to illuminate a surface or object and receive lightreflected from the surface or object. When the probe's distance from thetooth's surface is greater than the critical height h_(c) the receiverfiber optic is receiving light that is both reflected from the tooth'ssurface and light that is internally scattered and re-emitted by thetooth. When the distance of the probe is less than the critical heighth_(c), light that is reflected from the surface of the tooth no longercan be received by the received fiber optic. In general, the only lightthat can be accepted by the receiver fiber optic is light that haspenetrated enamel layer 540 and is re-emitted by the tooth (in caseswhere the object is a tooth).

Most of the internal light reflection and absorption within a toothoccurs at enamel-dentin interface or junction (DEJ) 542, which ingeneral separates enamel layer 540 from dentin 544. In accordance withthe present invention, an apparatus and method may be provided forquantifying optical properties of such sub-surface structures, such asthe color of DEJ 542, with or without comparison with data previouslytaken in order to facilitate the assessment or prediction of suchstructures.

Critical height h_(c), of the fiber optic probe such as previouslydescribed is a function of the fiber's numerical aperture and theseparation between the fibers. Thus, the critical height h_(c), of theprobe can be optimized based on the particular application. In addition,a probe may be constructed with multiple rings of receive fiber opticsand/or with multiple numerical aperture receiving fiber optics, therebyfacilitating assessment, etc., of enamel thickness, surface gloss, toothmorphology etc.

It is widely known that the thickness of the enamel layer of a toothvaries from the incisal edge to the cervical portion of the tooth crown,and from the middle of the tooth to the mesial and distal edges of thetooth (see FIGS. 37A and 37B, etc.). By utilizing multiple rings ofreceiver fiber optics, a measurement of the approximate thickness of theenamel layer may be made based on a comparison of the peak intensityabove the tooth surface and a measurement in contact with the toothsurface. A probe with multiple critical heights will give differentintensity levels when in contact with the tooth surface, therebyproducing data that may be indicative of the degree of internalscattering and enamel thickness or tooth morphology at the point ofcontact, etc.

Accordingly, in accordance with the present invention, the color orother optical characteristics of a sub-surface structure, such as DEJ542 of a tooth, may be assessed or quantified in a manner that is ingeneral independent of the optical characteristics of the surface of thetooth, and do so non-invasively, and do so in a manner that may alsoassess the thickness of the outer layer, such as enamel layer 540.

Additionally, and to emphasize the wide utility and variability ofvarious of the inventive concepts and techniques disclosed herein, itshould be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of thedisclosures herein that the apparatus and methodology may be utilized tomeasure the optical properties of objects/teeth using other opticalfocusing and gathering elements, in addition to the fiber opticsemployed in preferred embodiments herein. For example, lenses or mirrorsor other optical elements may also be utilized to construct both thelight source element and the light receiver element. A flashlight orother commonly available light source, as particular examples, may beutilized as the light source element, and a common telescope with aphotoreceiver may be utilized as the receiver element in a large scaleembodiment of the invention. Such refinements utilizing teachingsprovided herein are expressly within the scope of the present invention.

As will be apparent to those skilled in the art, certain refinements maybe made in accordance with the present invention. For example, a centrallight source fiber optic is utilized in certain preferred embodiments,but other light source arrangements (such as a plurality of light sourcefibers, etc.). In addition, lookup tables are utilized for variousaspects of the present invention, but polynomial type calculations couldsimilarly be employed. Thus, although various preferred embodiments ofthe present invention have been disclosed for illustrative purposes,those skilled in the art will appreciate that various modifications,additions and/or substitutions are possible without departing from thescope and spirit of the present invention as disclosed in the claims. Inaddition, while various embodiments utilize light principally in thevisible light spectrum, the present invention is not necessarily limitedto all or part of such visible light spectrum, and may include radiantenergy not within such visible light spectrum.

With reference to FIG. 5A, the intensity measured by a single receiverfiber is shown as a function of time as a source fiber optic and areceiver fiber optic pair are moved into contact with an object and aremoved away from the object. FIG. 5A illustrates the intensity as afunction of time, however as will be apparent to one skilled in the art,the intensity detected by the receiver fiber can also be measured andplotted as a function of height. A given fiber optic pair of source andreceiver fiber optics, perpendicular to a surface (or at least at afixed angle relative to a surface) will exhibit a certain intensity vs.height relationship. That relationship generally is consistent forcertain materials of consistent gloss, color and translucency. Themathematical intensity vs. height relationship for certain source andreceiver fiber optic pairs can be calculated or measured and stored as alook up table value or as a polynomial or other mathematicalrelationship. What is important to note is that there is an intensitypeak that is a function of the gloss, translucency and color of theobject being measured. For similar materials, the intensity value at agiven height varies dependent upon color, although the shape of theintensity vs. height curve is largely independent of color. Thus, aswill be apparent to one skilled in the art, the present invention mayalso serve as a proximity sensor, determining height from the intensitymeasurements. The instrument is calibrated by moving it towards theobject until the peaking intensity is detected. While the instrumentmoves towards the object, the light intensities are rapidly measured andsaved in memory such as RAM 10 shown in FIG. 1. From the value of themeasured peaking intensity (utilized to normalize the intensity vs.height relationship of the fiber pair) the proximity sensor can becalibrated. Thereafter, the present invention may be utilized to measurethe height of the fiber optic pair from the surface of the objectwithout contacting the object.

The present invention may find application in a wide range of industrialactivities. Certain applications of the present invention include, butare not limited to, measuring the optical properties of teeth andutilizing the measurements as part of a patient data base and utilizingthe measurements for dental prosthesis preparation.

Another application of the present invention is its use in dermatologyin quantifying the optical properties including color of skin and othertissues and saving the measurements as part of a patient data baserecord and utilizing the measurements made over a period of time fordiagnostic purposes.

Yet another application of the present invention is in the foodpreparation industry where the color and other optical properties ofcertain foods that are affected by the preparation process are measuredand monitored with the disclosed invention and are utilized to determinewhether or not the food meets certain acceptance criteria and where themeasurements may be also utilized as part of a control and feed backprocess whereby the food is further processed until it is eitheraccepted or rejected. Similarly, in automated food processing, such asfor vegetables or fruit, measurements may be taken and an assessment orprediction of the condition of the vegetable or fruit made, such asripeness.

Yet another application of the present invention is to measure the colorand optical properties of objects newly painted as part of a controlprocess. For example, paint may be applied to the object, with theobject then measured to determine if a suitable amount or type of painthas been applied, perhaps with the process repeated until a measurementcorresponding to a desired surface condition is obtained, etc.

Yet another application of the present invention is to measure theoptical properties of newly painted objects over a period of time todiscern if the paint has cured or dried. Similarly, such an object maybe measured to determine if additional gloss coatings, surface texturefactors or fluorescence factors, etc., should be added to achieve a moreoptimum or desired object.

Yet another application of the present invention is in an industrial orother control system, where items are color coded or have color or glossor translucency or combinations of optical properties that identify theobjects and where the optical properties are measured utilizing thedisclosed invention and are sorted according to their opticalproperties. In general, the present invention may be utilized to measurethe optical properties of objects in an industrial process flow, andthen compare such measurements with previously stored data in order tosort, categorize, or control the direction of movement of the object inthe industrial process.

Yet another application of the present invention is to place color codedor gloss coated or translucent tags or stickers on objects that serve asinventory control or routing control or other types of identification ofobjects in industrial processes.

Yet another application of the present invention is part of the printingprocess to measure and control the color or other optical properties ofinks or dies imprinted on materials. In such embodiments, implements asdescribed herein may be integrated into the printer or printingequipment, or used as a separate implement.

Yet another application of the present invention is part of thephotographic process to measure, monitor and control the opticalproperties of the photographic process. In such embodiments, implementsas described herein may be integrated into the camera or otherphotographic instrument, or used as a separate implement.

Yet another application of the present invention is to measure thedistance to the surface of objects without being placed into contactwith the object.

The present invention may be used in an industrial process in whichcoatings or material are added to or removed from an object. The objectmay be measured, and coatings or materials added or removed, with theobject re-measured and the process repeated until a desired object orother acceptance criteria are satisfied. In such processes, comparisonswith previously stored data may be used to assess whether the desiredobject is obtained or the acceptance criteria satisfied, etc.

In yet another application, the present invention is utilized in therestoration of paintings or other painted objects, such as art works,automobiles or other objects for which all or part may need to bepainted, with the applied paint matching certain existing paint or othercriteria. The present invention may be used to characterize whetherpaint to be applied will match the existing paint, etc. In suchprocesses, comparisons with previously stored data may be used to assesswhether the desired paint match will be obtained, etc.

In general, the present invention may find application in any industrialprocess in which an object or material may be measured for surfaceand/or subsurface optical characteristics, with the condition or statusof such object or material assessed or predicted based on suchmeasurements, possibly including comparisons with previously stored dataas previously described, etc. Additionally, and to emphasize the wideutility and variability of various of the inventive concepts andtechniques disclosed herein, it should be apparent to those skilled inthe art in view of the disclosures herein that the apparatus andmethodology may be utilized to measure the optical properties of objectsusing other optical focusing and gathering elements, in addition to thefiber optics employed in preferred embodiments herein. For example,lenses or mirrors or other optical elements may also be utilized toconstruct both the light source element and the light receiver element.A flashlight or other commonly available light source, as particularexamples, may be utilized as the light source element, and a commontelescope with a photoreceiver may be utilized as the receiver elementin a large scale embodiment of the invention. Such refinements utilizingteachings provided herein are expressly within the scope of the presentinvention.

In addition to the foregoing embodiments, features, applications anduses, other embodiments and refinements in accordance with the presentinvention will now be described. As with prior descriptions,descriptions to follow are without being bound by any particular theory,with the description provided for illustrative purposes. As before,although certain of the description to follow makes reference to objectsor materials, within the scope of the various embodiments of the presentinvention are dental objects such as teeth. Also as before, teeth or anyother particular objects referenced herein are exemplary uses, andvarious embodiments and aspects of the present invention may be used inother fields of endeavor.

A variety of devices may be used to measure and quantify the intensityof light, including, for example, photodiodes, charge coupled devices,silicon photo detectors, photomultiplier tubes and the like. In certainapplications it is desirable to measure light intensity over a broadband of light frequencies such as over the entire visible band. In otherapplications it is desirable to measure light intensities over narrowbands such as in spectroscopy applications. In yet other applications itis desirable to measure high light intensities such as in photographiclight meters. In still other applications it is desirable to measure lowlight intensities such as in abridged spectrometers. Typically whenmeasuring low light intensities, long sampling periods of the order ofone second or longer are required.

In accordance with other aspects of the present invention, a method andapparatus are disclosed that may be used to measure multiple lightinputs rapidly. Such an embodiment preferably utilizes a photodiodearray, such as the TSL230 manufactured by Texas Instruments, Inc., and agate array manufactured by Altera Corporation or Xilinx, Inc. In certainapplications, such an embodiment may be utilized to measure broad bandvisible and infra-red light. In other applications, such an embodimentmay be utilized as an abridged spectrometer in which each photodiodearray has a notch filter, such as an interference filter, positionedabove the light sensor.

The TSL230 consists of 100 silicon photodiodes arranged in a square 10by 10 array. The 100 photodiodes serve as an input to an integrator thatproduces an output signal of a frequency proportional to the intensityof light incident upon the array. The TSL230 has scale and sensitivityinputs allowing the sensitivity and scale to each be varied by a factorof 100, for a net range of 10⁴. The output frequency can vary from amaximum of approximately 300 k Hz (sensor is saturated) to sub Hzranges. Thus, the sensor can detect light inputs ranging over sevenorders of magnitude by varying the sensitivity and/or scale of thesensor and can detect light ranges of over five orders of magnitude at agiven setting.

In spectroscopy applications for such embodiments, each sensor ismounted with an optical filter such as an interference filter. As isknown in the art, interference filters have high out-of-band rejectionand high in-band transmission, and may be constructed with very narrowband pass properties. As an example, interference filters may beconstructed with band pass ranges of 20 nanometers or less. Inaccordance with certain aspects of the present invention, anabridged-type spectrometer may be constructed with TSL230 (or similar)sensors and interference filters that is suitable for reflectivity ortransmission spectrographic applications such as measuring the color ofobjects. In color determination applications it is not necessary todetect “line” spectra, but it often is desirable to have high gray scaleresolution, e.g., to be able to resolve the light intensity to 1 part in1000 or greater.

Instruments and methods for measuring the optical properties ofmaterials and objects have been previously described. Such an instrumentmay consist of a probe and an abridged spectrometer. The probe may bemoved into contact or near contact with the surface of the material orobject (by movement of the probe or material/object, etc.), and thespectrum of the light received by the probe was analyzed as the probewas moved towards the surface. Since the probe was not stationary,preferably numerous measurements are taken in succession, with thespectra dynamically taken and/or analyzed as the probe relatively movesin proximity with the object.

One difficulty that results from narrowing the band width of notch orinterference filters is that such narrowing reduces the light intensityincident upon each sensor. Thus, to measure low light levels, longsampling times typically are required. In the case of the TSL230 sensor,as the light level decreases, the output frequency of the devicedecreases. Thus, if it is desired to make 200 samples per second with anabridged spectrometer constructed with notch filters and TSL230s, oneneeds enough light to cause the TSL230 output to oscillate at a rate ofat least 200 Hz. Since the maximum range of the sensor is approximately300 k Hz, the maximum dynamic range of the sensor is reduced to (300 kHz)/(200 Hz) or roughly 1.5×10³. If the light inputs are low, then thedynamic range is reduced still further.

FIG. 38 illustrates an abridged visible light range spectrometer inaccordance with another embodiment of the present invention. Thisembodiment utilizes TSL230 sensors 616, a light source or lamp 604,preferably a hot mirror that reflects IR light with wavelengths above700 nanometers (not expressly shown in FIG. 38), fiber optic cableassembly consisting of one or more sources (illustrated by light path608) providing light to object 606, and one or more receivers(illustrated by light path 618) receiving light from object 606, gatearray 602 such as an Altera FLEX 10K30™ (believed to be a trademark ofAltera Corporation), which is coupled to computer 600 and receivessignal inputs from sensors 616 over bus 620. In one preferred embodimentup to fifteen or more TSL230 sensors are utilized. Each TSL230 sensor616 has an interference filter 614 positioned above the sensor, witheach filter preferably having a nominal bandwidth of 20 nanometers (orother bandwidth suitable for the particular application). Sensors 616also preferably receive a small and controlled amount of light (lightpath 610) directly from light source 604, preferably after IR filtering.The light source input to sensors 616 serves to bias sensors 616 toproduce an output of at least 200 Hz when no light is input to sensors616 from filters 614. Thus, sensors 616 will always produce an outputsignal frequency greater than or equal to the sampling frequency of thesystem. When input light intensities are small, the frequency change issmall, and when the light input is large, the frequency change will belarge. The scale and sensitivity of sensors 616 are set (by gate array602 over control bus 612, which may be under control of computer 600) todetect the entire range of light input values. In most cases,particularly in object color determination, the maximum amount of lightinput into any one of sensors 616 is determined by light source 604 andfilters 614 and can be appropriately controlled.

Gate array 602 serves to measure the output frequency and period of eachof sensors 616 independently. This may be done by detecting whenever anoutput changes and both counting the number of changes per samplingperiod and storing the value of a high speed counter in a first registerthe first time an output changes, and storing the value in a secondregister for each subsequent change. The second register will thus holdthe final value of the timer. Both high to low and low to hightransitions preferably are detected. The output frequency (f) of eachsensor is thus:${\left. 1 \right)\quad f} = \frac{\left( {N - 1} \right)}{\left( {P_{h} - P_{l}} \right)}$where:

-   -   N=Number of transitions in sample period;    -   P_(l)=Initial timer count; and    -   P_(h)=Final timer count.

The internal high speed timer is reset at the start of each samplingperiod ensuring that the condition P_(h)>P₁ is always true.

The precision of a system in accordance with such an embodiment may bedetermined by the system timer clock frequency. If P_(r) is the desiredprecision and S_(r) is the sampling rate, then the frequency of thetimer clock is:f _(t) =P _(r) ·S _(r)  (2)For example, for a sampling rate of 200 and a precision of 2¹⁶, thetimer clock frequency is 200×2¹⁶ or 13 MHz.

If the input light intensities are high, N will be a large number. Ifthe input light intensities are low, N will be small (but always greaterthan 2, with proper light biasing). In either case, however, P_(h)−P_(l)will be a large number and will always be on the order of ½ theprecision of the system. Thus, in accordance with such embodiments, thetheoretical precision to which the light intensities can be measured maybe the same for all sensors, independent of light input intensity. Ifone sensor has an output range of 200 to 205 Hz (very low light input),the intensities of light received by this sensor may be measured toabout the same precision as a sensor with 10,000 times more light input(range of 200 to 50,200 Hz). This aspect of such embodiments is veryunlike certain conventional light sensors, such as those utilizing ADCs,analog multiplexers and sample and hold amplifiers, where the precisionof the system is limited to the number of bits of the ADC available overthe input range. To provide for the wide input range in a system with anADC, a variable gain sample and hold amplifier typically is required. Itis also difficult for an ADC to sample to 16 bits accurately.

With such embodiments of the present invention, the absolute accuracygenerally is limited by the stability of the lamp and electrical noise,both of which may be reduced and in general are minimal because of thesimplicity of the design and the few components required on a circuitcard. A gate array, which may be field programmable or the like,typically may readily accommodate 20 or more TSL230 sensors and alsoprovide for an interface to a computer, microprocessor ormicrocontroller utilizing the light data. It also should be noted that,instead of a gate array, such embodiments may be implemented with highspeed RISC processors or by DSPs or other processing elements.

It should be noted that the use of light biasing, and other aspectsthereof, also are described elsewhere herein.

In addition to the foregoing embodiments, features, applications anduses, still other embodiments and refinements in accordance with thepresent invention will now be described.

Certain objects and materials such as gems and teeth exhibit reflectedlight spectrums that are a function of incident light angle andreflected light angle. Such objects and materials are sometimes referredto as opalescent materials. In accordance with other embodiments of thepresent invention, instruments and methodologies may be provided forspecifically measuring and/or quantifying the opalescent characteristicsof objects and materials, in addition to characteristics such as color,gloss, translucency and surface texture, it being understood thatpreviously described embodiments also may be used to capture spectraland other data (such as a plurality of spectrums), which can be comparedand/or processed to quantify such opalescent materials.

Such a further embodiment of the present invention is illustrated inFIG. 39. In accordance with this embodiment, light source 638 provideslight coupled through a light path (preferably light source fiber 636)to probe 630 through optical cable 632. Light received by the probe(i.e., returned from the object or material being evaluated) is coupledto spectrometer/light sensors 640 through a suitable light path(preferably one or more light receiver fibers from optical cable 632).Computer 642 is coupled to spectrometer/light sensors 640 by way ofcontrol/data bus 648. Computer 642 also is coupled to light source 638by way of control line(s) 646, which preferably control the on/offcondition of light source 638, and optionally may provide other controlinformation, analog or digital signal levels, etc., to light source 638as may be desired to optimally control the particular light chosen forlight source 638, and its particular characteristics, and for theparticular application. Light from light source 638 optionally may becoupled to spectrometer/light sensors 640 by light path 644, such as forpurposes of providing light bias (if required or desired for theparticular spectrometer chosen), or for monitoring the characteristicsof light source 638 (such as drift, temperature effects and the like).

Computer 642 may be a conventional computer such as a PC ormicrocontroller or other processing device, and preferably is coupled toa user interface (e.g., display, control switches, keyboard, etc.),which is generically illustrated in FIG. 39 by interface 652.Optionally, computer 642 is coupled to other computing devices, such asmay be used for data processing, manipulation, storage or furtherdisplay, through interface 650. Computer 642 preferably includes thetypical components such as (but not limited to) a CPU, random access orother memory, non-volatile memory/storage for storing program code, andmay include interfaces for the user such as display, audio generators,keyboard or keypad or touch screen or mouse or other user input device(which may be through interface 652), and optionally interfaces to othercomputers such as parallel or serial interfaces (which may be throughinterface 650). Computer 642 interfaces to spectrometer/light sensors640 for control of the spectrometer and overall system and to receivelight intensity and light spectrum data from spectrometer/light sensors640. In a preferred embodiment, control/data bus 648 for interfacing tospectrometer/light sensors 640 is a standard 25 pin bi-directionalparallel port. In certain embodiments, computer 642 may be separate,standalone and/or detachable from spectrometer/light sensors 640 and maybe a conventional laptop, notebook or other portable or handheld-typepersonal computer. In other embodiments, computer 642 may be an integralpart of the system contained in one or more enclosure(s), and may be anembedded personal computer or other type of integrated computer.Purposes of computer 642 preferably include controlling light source 638and spectrometer/light sensors 640, receiving light intensity andspectral or other data output from spectrometer/light sensors 640,analyzing received or other data and determining the optical propertiesof the object or material, and displaying or outputting data to a useror other computing device or data gathering system.

In a preferred embodiment, the output end of probe 630 may beconstructed as illustrated in FIG. 40. Numerous other probeconfigurations, including probe configurations as described elsewhereherein, may be used in such embodiments. In accordance with suchpreferred embodiments, optical characteristics determinationsystems/methods may be obtained that provide for a broader range ofmeasurement parameters, and, in certain applications, may be easier toconstruct. Probe cross section 656 includes central fiber optic 658,which is preferably surrounded by six perimeter fiber optics 660 and662. Central fiber optic 658 is supplied by light from the light source(such as light source 638). Six perimeter fiber optics 660 and 662 arelight receivers and pass to spectrometer/light sensors 640. In onepreferred embodiment, all seven fiber optics have the same numericalaperture (NA); however, as disclosed below, the numerical aperture ofthe light source and consequently the source fiber optic preferably canbe varied. Also, in certain embodiments the received cone of light fromcertain of the receiver fiber optics is also controlled and varied toeffectively vary the NA of certain receivers.

As illustrated in FIG. 40, central fiber optic 658 (S) serves as thelight source. Fiber optics 660 labeled 1, 3, 5 preferably are “wideband” fibers and pass to light sensors (preferably withinspectrometer/light sensors 640) that measure light intensity over anentire spectral range. The other three light receivers 662 labeled 2, 4,6 preferably are “dual” receivers and pass to both a spectrometer and to“wide band” light sensors (also preferably within spectrometer/lightsensors 640). As previously described, the probe in conjunction with aspectrometer, computer, light source and “wide band” light receivers canbe used to measure the color and translucency and surface properties ofteeth and other materials. Also as previously described, the probe witha combination of NA “wide band” receiver fiber optics can additionallybe utilized to measure the gloss or the degree of specular versusdiffuse light received from a surface.

FIG. 41A is a diagram of a preferred embodiment of spectrometer/lightsensors 640. In this embodiment, certain optical fibers from the probeare coupled to wide band light sensors (such sensors, which may includeTSL230 sensors and optics and/or filters as described elsewhere hereinare illustrated as sensors 676 in FIG. 41A), while other of the opticalfibers are coupled to both a spectrometer, in order to spectrallymeasure the light received by the probe, and to wide band light sensors.Fibers 660 (1, 3, 5) preferably are coupled to three wide band lightsensors (light path 682 of FIG. 41A). Preferably, the lightreceiving/sensing elements are Texas Instruments TSL230s, although theymay also be photo diodes, CCDs or other light sensors. Fibers 660 (1, 3,5) preferably are masked by iris 694 to reduce the size of the cone oflight produced by the fiber as illustrated in FIG. 42. Mask or iris 694serves to limit the NA of the receiver by allowing only light rays witha maximum angle of a to be received by the receiver light sensor.

If:

-   -   h=height of end of fiber to iris    -   r=radius of opening of the iris    -   a=radius of the fiber        $\alpha = {{Tan}^{- 1}\left( \frac{r + a}{h} \right)}$        Hence, the effective NA of the receiver fiber optic can be        reduced and controlled with iris 694. By utilizing a variable        iris or an iris that is controlled with a servo such as those        utilized in conventional cameras, the NA of the receiver fiber        optic can be controlled by the system and can be varied to best        match the object or material being measured. Referring again to        FIG. 42, exemplary receiver fiber 690 provides light to        exemplary light sensor 676 through iris 694. Light rays such as        light rays 696A of a certain limited angle pass through iris        694, while other light rays within the acceptance angle of fiber        690 (the outer limit of the acceptance angle is illustrated by        dashed line 696 in FIG. 42) but not within the limited angular        range allowed by iris 694 are blocked, thereby enabling iris 694        to effectively emulate having a reduced or variable NA light        receiver.

Referring again to FIG. 41A, light source 638 may be coupled to certainof sensors 676 through light path 674. Light bias, such as previouslydescribed, may be provided from the light source, or alternatively, fromseparately provided LED 680, which may couple light to certain ofsensors 676 for providing controllable light bias to sensors 676 throughlight conduit 678. Control of LED 680 for providing controllable lightbias to certain of sensors 676, etc., is described elsewhere herein.Light from fibers 662 preferably are coupled (through light path 684 inFIG. 41A) to one or more diffusing cavities 686 (described in moredetail elsewhere herein), outputs of which are coupled to certain ofsensors 676 through light paths/conduits 688 as illustrated. Control ofsensors 676, and data output from sensors 676, preferably is achieved byway of gate array 670, which may be coupled to a computing device by wayof interface 668 (the use of gate array or similar processing elementand the use of such a computer device are described elsewhere herein).

The use of diffusing cavities 686 in such embodiments will now befurther described. As illustrated, certain of the light receivers 662(2, 4, 6) may be coupled to one or more diffusing cavities 686 throughlight path 684, which may serve to split the light receivers into, forexample, six (or more or fewer) fiber optics with a diffusing cavity asillustrated in FIGS. 43A, 43B, and 43C. One of light receivers 662 isthe central fiber in diffusing cavity 686 and is surrounded by six fiberoptics 702 as part of fiber optic bundle 698. Diffusing cavity 686serves to remove any radial or angular light distribution patterns thatmay be present in receiver fiber optic 662, and also serves to moreevenly illuminate the six surrounding fiber optics. Thus, lightreceivers 662 (2, 4, 6) illustrated in FIG. 40 may each be split intosix (or a different number) fibers resulting in eighteen receivers.Three of the eighteen fibers, one per diffusing cavity, preferably passto wide band sensors which may have iris 694 (see FIG. 42). The otherfifteen fibers preferably pass to a spectrometer system (such as part ofspectrometer/light sensors 640, which may consist of a plurality ofsensors 676, such as previously described). For the visible band,fifteen fiber optics and interference notch filters preferably are usedto provide a spectral resolution of:${\left. 2 \right)\quad\frac{{700\quad n\quad m} - {400\quad n\quad m}}{15}} = {20\quad n\quad{m.}}$A greater or lesser number of fibers and filters may be utilized inaccordance with such embodiments in order to increase or decrease thespectral resolution of the system/spectrometer.

In FIGS. 41B and 43C, an alternate embodiment of the present inventionutilizing a different arrangement of diffusing cavity 686 will now bedescribed. In such embodiments, three “dual band” receivers 662 are allpositioned in common fiber optic bundle 698 and one diffusing cavity 686is utilized. Fiber optic bundle 698 preferably contains three receiverfibers 662 and fifteen additional fibers 703 for the spectrometersystem, although greater or fewer fibers may be utilized in otherarrangements depending on the number of color sensors in the system. Incertain embodiments, fifteen fiber optics 703 in the bundle may be ofdifferent diameters to increase the efficiency of diffusing cavity 686and the cross sectional packing arrangement of the optical fibers infiber optic bundle 698. As an example of such preferred fiber bundlearrangements in accordance with such embodiments, larger diameter fibersmay be utilized for the color filters in the blue range of the visiblespectrum, where the light intensity from a tungsten-halogen lamp source638 is significantly less than in the red region of the visiblespectrum.

As described elsewhere herein, a spectrometer system may be constructedof Texas Instruments TSL230 light sensors, interference filters, lightbiasing elements and a gate array such an Altera FLEX 10K30 in order tocontrol the light sensors, interface to a computer via a parallel orother interface and to measure the frequency and period of the lightsensors simultaneously at a high rate in order to accurately and rapidlymeasure light spectrums and light intensities. Although suchspectrometer systems are used in preferred embodiments, otherspectrometers such as those utilizing, for example, CCDs withdiffraction gratings are utilized in other embodiments.

FIG. 44 illustrates a further refinement of aspects of aspectrometer-type system in accordance with the present invention. Afiber optic, such as one of the fifteen fibers from three diffusingcavities as described earlier, preferably pass to light sensor 710(which may be a TSL230 light sensor, as previously described) throughinterference filter 708. Interference filters such as interferencefilter 708 serve as notch filters passing light over a narrow bandwidthand rejecting light that is out of band. The bandwidth of the lighttransmitted through the filter, however, is dependent upon the angle ofincidence of the light on the filter, and in general is broadened as theangle of incidence increases. Since fiber optics produce a cone oflight, it has been determined that it is desirable to collimate the coneto reduce such bandwidth spreading. As illustrated in FIG. 44, the coneof light produced by exemplary fiber optic 704 (illustrated by lines712A) preferably is collimated with first aspheric lens (or fresnellens) 706A (illustrated by lines 712B) prior to entering interferencefilter 708. Light emitted from filter 708 (illustrated by lines 712C) is“gathered” by second aspheric lens (or fresnel lens) 706B to concentrate(illustrated by lines 712D) as much light as possible on light sensor710. In accordance with such embodiments, filters, particularlyinterference-type filters, may more optimally be utilized in a manner toreduce such bandwidth spreading or other undesirable effects.

Referring again to FIG. 41A (the discussion also is generally applicableto FIG. 41B), light biasing as previously described will be discussed ingreater detail. As previously described, in order to rapidly sampleTSL230-type sensors, the sensors may require light biasing. Withoutlight biasing, depending upon the light intensity presented to theparticular sensors, a TSL230 sensor may not produce an output changepair of transitions (e.g., high to low and low to high transitions, orlow to high and high to low transitions) during the sampling period,hence a light intensity measurement may not be possible for that sensor.In preferred embodiments, the sensing system detects both high to lowand low to high transitions and requires at minimum two transitions tomake a measurement. In other words, such system measures half periods.For example, assume that as the light intensity on a particular TSL230decreases such that its output frequency decreases from 201 Hz to 199Hz. At 201 Hz, the output of the TSL230 transitions with a period of{fraction (1/201)} sec or every 4.975 ms. At 199 Hz, the outputtransition period is {fraction (1/199)} sec or 5.025 ms. If the samplingrate is 200 samples per second, then the sampling period is 5.00 ms.Thus, if the TSL230 transitions every 4.975 ms, the sensing system willalways detect either two or three transitions and will always be able tomake an intensity measurement. At 199 Hz, however, the detectioncircuitry will detect either one or two transitions. As a result, duringcertain sampling intervals, measurements are possible, while duringother intervals measurements are not possible, thereby resulting inmeasurement discontinuities even though the light intensity has notchanged.

It is desirable to measure light over a broad range of intensity valuesat high rates including very low light intensities. By utilizing lightbiasing of the TSL230 sensors as illustrated in FIG. 41A, the minimaloutput frequency of the TSL230s can be controlled. The minimal lightvalue preferably is measured as part of a normalization or calibrationprocedure as follows.

-   1. The light bias is turned on and allowed to stabilize.-   2. The probe is placed into a black enclosure. A “black level”    intensity measurement I_(b) is made and recorded for each sensor,    preferably in a simultaneous manner.-   3. The light source is turned on and allowed to stabilize. A “white    level” intensity measurement I_(w) is made and recorded for each    sensor, again preferably in a simultaneous manner, on a “white”    standard such as barium sulfide or on “Spectralon,” believed to be a    trademarked product of Labsphere, Inc. The actual intensities    measured by all sensors will vary from the standard values I_(s).    Typically in color measurements the standard value I_(s) is    nominally “100%.”-   4. Subsequent light measurements may be normalized by subtracting    the “black level” intensity and by adjusting the gain from the white    level measurement resulting in a normalized intensity I_(N) for each    sensor as follows:    ${\left. 3 \right)\quad I_{N}} = {\frac{I_{s}}{I_{w} - I_{b}}\left( {I - I_{b}} \right)}$    where I=Intensity measurement and IN is the normalized or calibrated    intensity measurement. It should be noted that in such preferred    embodiments the normalization is made for each light sensor, and    independent “black level” and “white level” intensities are saved    for each sensor.

In certain situations, a long time may be required for the light sourceand for the light bias source to stabilize. In other situations, thelight source and bias source may drift. In preferred embodiments, thelight source is a 18 W, 3300 K halogen stabilized tungsten filament lampmanufactured by Welch Allyn, Inc. The light bias preferably is providedby a high intensity LED and a fiber optic light guide or conduit (seeLED 680 and light conduit 678 of FIG. 41A) that passes to each biasedsensor of sensors 676. The intensity of LED 680 preferably is controlledand varied with high frequency pulse width modulation, or by analogconstant current controllers. By controlling the intensity of bias LED680, the bias light level can be varied to best match the sensorsampling rate.

Preferably, one sensor, such as a TSL230 sensor, is provided to measurethe intensity of LED 680 and to correct for intensity variations of theLED light biasing system. Since LED 680 is monochromatic, one sensortypically is sufficient to track and correct for bias LED intensitydrift. The LED bias intensity preferably is measured and recorded whenthe “black level” measurement is made. For each subsequent lightintensity measurement, the black level for each sensor is corrected forLED drift as follows:${\left. 4 \right)\quad{I_{b}({Corrected})}} = {I_{b}\frac{I({BiasSensor})}{I_{b}({BiasSensor})}}$where: I(BiasSensor) is the intensity measured by the bias sensor,I_(b)(BiasSensor) is the “black level” intensity measured by the biassensor, I_(b) is the “black level” intensity measured by a light sensor(other than the bias sensor) and I_(b)(Corrected) is the adjusted biasused in equation 4) above.

Light source drift preferably is measured by a plurality of lightsensors. Since the light source is polychromatic light, its spectrum mayalso drift. It is understood that tungsten filament lamps producespectrums that are very nearly approximated by the spectrums of blackbody radiators and can be represented by the Planck law for black bodyradiators.${\left. 5 \right)\quad{I(\lambda)}} = {\left( \frac{2 \cdot \pi \cdot h \cdot c}{\lambda^{3}} \right)\left( \frac{1}{{\mathbb{e}}^{\frac{hc}{{k \cdot T}\quad\lambda}} - 1} \right)}$The only variable affecting the intensity of a black body radiator atany wavelength within the visible band is the temperature (T) of thesource. Thus, a single narrow band light sensor may be utilized todetect temperature variations of such a source. Additional factors,however, may affect the spectral output of the lamp, such as depositingof the filament on the lamp envelope or adjusting the spectrum of thelamp as described below. In the preferred embodiment, for more accuratespectral corrections and intensity variations of the lamp, additionalnarrow band filters are utilized. In certain of such preferredembodiments, three band pass filters and sensors are utilized to measurethe spectral shift and intensity of the lamp in a continuous manner, andsuch filters and sensors preferably are further utilized to correct forlamp spectral and intensity drift.

FIG. 45 illustrates a preferred embodiment of a light source used inpreferred embodiments of the present invention. Such a light sourcepreferably consists of halogen tungsten filament lamp 724, with a lensmolded into the envelope of the lamp that produces a concentrated lightpattern on an axis parallel to the body of lamp 724. The use of such alens in lamp 724 is to concentrate the light output and to reduce theshadowing of the lamp filament that may result from lamps withreflectors. Hot mirror 722, which preferably is a “0° hot mirror,”reduces the intensity of IR light input into the system. In certainembodiments, the hot mirror may also contain color correctionproperties, for example, reducing light intensity for longer (red)wavelengths more than for shorter (blue) wavelengths. Light output fromlamp 724 passes through hot mirror 722 preferably to tapered glass rod720. The end of glass rod 720 nearest lamp 724 preferably has a diameternominally the diameter of the envelope of lamp 724. The other end ofglass rod 720 preferably is nominally 4 mm, or up to four times or morethe diameter of source fiber optic 714.

Glass rod 720 serves a number of purposes. First, glass rod 720 servesas a heat shield for fiber optic 714 by allowing fiber optic 714 to bedisplaced from lamp 724, with fiber optic 714 being thermally insulatedfrom lamp 724 by the existence of glass rod 720. Second, glass rod 720serves to concentrate the light over a smaller area near fiber optic 714and to broaden the angular distribution of light emerging from thenarrow end to provide a distributed light pattern that can uniformly“fill” the NA of source fiber optic 714. Without tapered glass rod 720,the angular distribution pattern of light emerging from lamp 724 may notentirely or evenly fill the acceptance cone of source fiber optic 714.To ensure that source fiber optic 714 is desirably filled with lightwithout an implement such as glass rod 720 would require source fiberoptic 714 to be very close to lamp 724, thereby creating a risk thatsource fiber optic 714 will overheat and possibly melt.

Between source fiber optic 714 and glass rod 720 preferably is iris 718.Iris 718 preferably is utilized to limit the angular range of light raysentering source fiber optic 714. When iris 718 is fully open, the entireacceptance cone of source fiber optic 714 may be filled. As iris 718 isclosed, the cone of light incident upon source fiber optic 714 isreduced, and hence the angular distribution of light incident upon fiberoptic 714 is reduced. As iris 718 is reduced further, it is possible toproduce a nearly collimated beam of light incident upon fiber optic 714.

It is understood that a property of fiber optics whose ends are highlypolished perpendicular to the axis of the fiber optic is that the angleof light incident on one end of the fiber optic is preserved as it exitsthe other end of the fiber optic. As is known to those skilled in theart, numerous technologies exist for polishing fiber optic cables. Thus,with a highly polished fiber optic, by varying the diameter of iris 718,the cone of light entering source fiber optic 714 can be controlled, andthus the cone of light emerging from source fiber optic 714 can becontrolled.

In an alternate embodiment, iris 718 is replaced by disk 730, whichpreferably includes a pattern of holes positioned near its perimeter asillustrated in FIGS. 46A and 46B. Preferably, disk 730 is driven withstepping motor 738 through gear 736 and gear teeth 730A so that disk 730may be rapidly moved to a desired position and held it in a stableposition in order to make a light measurement. Stepping motor 738 iscontrolled by a computer (such as described elsewhere herein; see, e.g.,FIGS. 38 and 39), which controls disk 730 to rotate about axis 732 andstop in a desired and controllable position. Thus, such a computer ineffect can vary the NA of the light source synchronously to eachmeasurement. The procedure preferably progresses as follows.

-   1. Rotate the disk to the desired aperture.-   2. Pause to allow the disk to stabilize.-   3. Measure one light sample.-   4. Rotate the disk to the next desired aperture and repeat the    process as required.

As illustrated FIG. 46B, the pattern of holes on disk 730 may be roundor any other desired shape. Such apertures also may constitute a patternof microscopic holes distributed to affect the light pattern of light orspectrum of light entering the source fiber. Additionally, the disk maycontain filters or diffraction gratings or the like to affect thespectrum of the light entering the source fiber. Such holes or aperturesalso may consist of rings that produce cones of light where the lightrays entering the fiber are distributed over a narrow or other desiredrange of angles. With the disk embodiment of FIGS. 46A and 46B, it ispossible to control the light pattern of source fiber optic 714effectively over a wide range of angles.

Referring again to FIG. 45, light conduit 716 passes light such asthrough light path 674 to sensors 676 (see, e.g., FIGS. 41A and 41B) formeasuring the spectral properties of the lamp as described earlier. Ifthe iris or aperture disk controlling the distribution of light enteringsource fiber optic 714 modifies the spectral properties of the lightsource, then the resulting spectrum can be adjusted as describedearlier.

When a pair of fiber optics is utilized as described herein where onefiber serves as a light source and another fiber serves as a lightreceiver, the intensity of light received by the receiver fiber varieswith the height of the pair above the surface of the object or materialand also with the angle of the pair relative to the surface of theobject or material. As described earlier, in certain preferredembodiments the angle of the probe relative to the surface may bedetected by utilizing three or more fiber optic receivers having thesame receiver NA. After normalization of the system, if the intensitiesof the three receiver fibers (such as fibers 660 (1, 3, 5) in FIG. 40)are the same, then this is an indication that the probe is perpendicularto the surface. If the intensities vary between the three sensors, thenthis is an indication that the probe is not perpendicular to thesurface. As a general statement, this phenomenon occurs at all heights.In general, the intensity variation of the three fibers is dependentupon the geometry of the three fibers in the probe and is independent ofthe color of the material. Thus, as the probe is tilted towards fiber 1,for example, the intensities measured by sensors 3 and 5 will benominally equal, but the intensity measured by fiber 1 will vary fromfibers 3 and 5. As a result, the system can detect an angular shifttowards fiber 1. In preferred embodiments, by comparing the intensityvalues of fiber 1 to fibers 3 and 5, a measurement of the angle can bemade and the intensity of fibers 1, 3 and 5 can be corrected by acorrection or gain factor to “adjust” its light measurement tocompensate for the angular shift of the probe. It is thus possible withthe probe arrangement illustrated in FIG. 40 to detect and measureangular changes.

Angular changes also will affect the intensities measured by the otherfibers 662 (2, 4, 6). In a similar manner, the difference between the“wide band” sensors in fibers 662 (2, 4, 6) can also be utilized tofurther quantify the angle of the probe and can be utilized to adjustthe light intensity measurements. It should be noted, however, that theintensity shift due to angle of the probe affects the fibersdifferently. If sensors 662 (2, 4, 6) are utilized in the spectrometerillustrated in FIG. 41A, the intensity adjustment must be madeindependently for each fiber and for the set of six fibers emerging fromdiffusing cavity 686 illustrated in FIG. 43A. However, if one diffusingcavity 686 is utilized as illustrated in FIG. 41B, the angle correctionapplies to all sensors supplied by light paths 703 equally. With such anembodiment as illustrated in FIG. 41B, angle determination and/orcorrection may be made in a manner more desirable for some applications.

As the probe approaches the surface of an object or material (the probemay be moved towards the material or the material may be moved towardsthe probe), the source fiber illuminates the object/material. Some lightmay reflect from the surface of the object/material, and some light maypenetrate the object/material (if it is translucent or has a translucentlayer on its surface) and re-emerge from the material and may strike thereceiver fiber optic. As described elsewhere herein, the intensitymeasured by the receiver exhibits a peaking phenomenon where the lightintensity varies to a maximum value, and then falls until the probe isin contact with the object/material where it exhibits a minimum. If theobject/material is opaque, then the light intensity at the minimum isessentially zero. If the object/material is highly translucent, then theintensity may be near the peaking intensity.

Based on such phenomena, in accordance with other aspects of the presentinvention, it is possible to quantify the height of the probe and toadjust for height variations of the probe near the peaking height bymeasuring the peaking height intensity of the “wide band” sensors andcomparing the intensity value at other heights and adjusting the gain ofall sensors by the ratio of the measured intensity to the peakingintensity. If I_(p) is the peak intensity of a wide band receiver, andI_(m) is the intensity measured when the probe is in contact with thematerial, and I is the intensity measured at a height less than thepeaking height then the ratio:${\left. 6 \right)\quad G} = \frac{I_{p} - I_{m}}{I - I_{m}}$is the gain adjustment factor. If the gain adjustment factor is appliedto the spectrometer sensors, then the spectrum may be measuredindependent of height for a wide range of heights within the peakingheight.

Reference should now be made to FIGS. 47A and 47B. As a fiber optic pair(e.g., source fiber optic 742 and receiver fiber optic 744) approach amaterial or object 746, material or object 746 is illuminated by sourcefiber optic 742 (see, e.g., lines 745 of FIG. 47A). The light emittedfrom source fiber optic 742 may be controlled as described elsewhereherein. Thus, source fiber optic 742 can be controlled so as toilluminate material or object 746 with nearly collimated light (smallincident angles), or source fiber optic 742 can be controlled toilluminate material or object 746 with wide incident angles, or with apattern of angles or with different spectral properties. If source fiberoptic 742 is illuminated with an aperture disk with a slit pattern asillustrated in FIG. 46B, then source fiber optic 742 may be used toilluminate material or object 746 with a narrow singular range ofangles.

Consider source fiber optic 742 and receiver fiber optic 744 with thesame NA as illustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B. The angular distribution oflight provided by source fiber optic 742 is dependent upon the sourcefiber only (and the angle of the probe) and is independent of the heightof the fiber from the material. If the probe is held substantiallyperpendicular to material or object 746, the angular distribution oflight is independent of height. The area illuminated by source fiber742, however, is height dependent and increases with increasing height.Receiver fiber optic 744 can only receive light that is within itsacceptance angle, thus it can only detect light reflected from thesurface that is reflected from the area of overlap of the two conesillustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B.

FIG. 47A illustrates the fiber pair at the peaking height, while FIG.47B illustrates the fiber pair at the critical height. At the criticalheight, the only light reflecting from the surface that can be receivedby receiver fiber 744 is the source ray 745 and the reflected ray 748with angle of incidence equal to angle of reflection, or it can onlydetect “spectrally” reflected light. When the probe is at the peakingheight, however, the reflected light rays that can be received by thereceiver fiber vary over both a wider angle of incidence range and widerangle of reflection range. Thus, at the peaking height, the receiver isdetecting a broad range of incident angle light rays and reflected anglelight rays. By adjusting the spectrum for height shifts as describedabove and by detecting the angle of the probe relative to the surface ofthe material or object, the reflected or returned spectrum can bemeasured over a wide incident angular range and reflected angular range.

In general, for opaque surfaces, diffuse or specular, the heightadjusted spectrum will appear constant as the probe approaches thematerial or object. In general, for opalescent materials or objects,i.e., materials with a translucent surface in which light rays maypenetrate the material and be re-emitted, the height adjusted spectrumwill shift as the probe approaches the material or object. In general,for translucent materials such as teeth or gem stones, the spectrum willfurther shift when the probe is less than the critical height and incontact or near contact with the material or object.

As a further refinement to certain aspect of the present invention, theiris illustrated in FIG. 45 or the aperture disk illustrated in FIGS.46A and 46B may be utilized. In one such embodiment, the NA of sourcefiber optic 714 is held constant as the probe approaches the material orobject, and light intensity and spectrum measurements are made and savedin a data queue as described earlier. When the probe is in contact withthe material or object, the NA of source fiber optic 714 is changed(either from narrow to wide or from wide to narrow, depending upon thestate of the first set of measurements), and spectral measurements aremade as a function of source NA. The probe is then moved away from thematerial and light intensity and spectral measurements are made as thedistance from the probe increases and as the probe passes through thepeaking height. The spectral shift that occurs as a result of thevariance of the source NA and height preferably is used to quantify theopalescence of the material or object.

In an alternate embodiment, the aperture disk illustrated in FIGS. 46Aand 46B is rotated by stepping motor 738 synchronously to measuring thelight and spectral data as the probe is moved into proximity to thematerial or object or into contact with the material or object. Inanother alternate embodiment, the probe is positioned at a fixed heightfrom the material or in contact with the material or object and the NAof the source fiber is varied as light intensity and spectral data aremeasured. In yet another alternate embodiment, both the source andreceiver fiber NAs are varied as described earlier, and the resultingspectra are utilized to quantify the optical properties of the material.

An alternative embodiment of the present invention for quantifying thedegree of gloss of a material will now be described with reference toFIGS. 48A and 48B. FIGS. 48A and 48B illustrate source (742) andreceiver (744) fiber pair positioned above a highly specular surfacesuch as a mirror (FIG. 48A) and above a diffuse surface (FIG. 48B). Thecone of light from source fiber optic 742 is illustrated by circle 742A,and the acceptance cone of receiver fiber optic 744 is illustrated bycircle 744A, with the overlap illustrated by area 750. On a specularsurface, the only light that will be received by receiver fiber optic744 are the light rays whose angle of reflection equal the angle ofincidence, thus the only light rays striking the surface of receiver 744are the light rays striking the small circular area the size of thediameter of the fiber optics as illustrated by circle 752 in FIG. 48A.As long as receiver fiber optic 744 has an NA greater than source fiberoptic 742, all light incident upon receiver fiber optic 744 will beaccepted. Thus, the angular distribution of received light rays inreceiver fiber optic 744 is limited to a very narrow range and isdependent upon the height of the fiber optic pair from the surface.

Consider FIG. 48B, which illustrates a fiber optic pair positioned abovea diffuse surface. Any light ray incident upon the area of overlap ofthe two cones can be received by receiver fiber optic 744 (provided ofcourse that it is incident upon the receiver fiber). Thus, for diffusesurfaces, the angular distribution of light rays received by receiverfiber optic 744 is also height dependent, but is greater than theangular distribution for a specular surface. In accordance with suchembodiments of the present invention, such angular distributionvariation may be used to quantify optical properties such as gloss for aparticular material or object.

A detector in accordance with other embodiments of the present inventionis illustrated in FIG. 49, where single receiver fiber 758 is positionedabove a radial distribution of sensors (illustrated by sensors 760A and760B). Two or more sensors may be utilized, in one or two dimensions,although only two sensors are illustrated in FIG. 49 for discussionpurposes. In the illustrated embodiment, one sensor (sensor 760B) ispositioned corresponding to the center of fiber 758 and measures anglesnear zero, and the other sensor (sensor 760A) is positioned atapproximately ½ the acceptance angle of receiver fiber 758. In alternateembodiments, the sensors may be arranged or configured in a linear arraysuch as a CCD, or a two dimensional sensor such as a video camera CCD orMOS sensor. In accordance with aspects of the present invention, byanalyzing the intensity patterns of the sensors, the degree of gloss ofthe material may be measured and quantified.

As the probe is moved towards the material or object, the angulardistribution of light received by receiver fiber 758 changes dependentupon the surface of the material or object as illustrated in FIGS. 50Aand 50B. FIG. 50A illustrates the intensity pattern for the two sensorsfor a specular surface, and FIG. 50B shows the intensity pattern for adiffuse surface. Specular materials in general will tend to exhibit apeaking pattern where the peaking intensity of sensor 1 is much largerthan the peaking intensity of sensor 2. For diffuse materials thepeaking intensity of sensor 2 (wide angles) is closer to the peakingintensity of sensor 1. By quantifying the variation in peaking intensitythe degree of gloss of the material can be additionally quantified. Inaddition, in alternative embodiments, the relative values of the sensorsat a time when one or the other sensors is peaking are captured andfurther used to quantify the optical properties of the material orobject.

Various particular preferred embodiments of the present invention willnow be described that relate to detecting and preventing counterfeitingand the like.

Numerous negotiable instruments exist that are created utilizingprinting processes or the like. Such negotiable instruments includecurrency, bonds, stocks, securities, travelers checks, checks, creditcards, passports, and other types of business, legal and/or governmentaldocuments or certificates, etc. In many cases the printing process ishighly refined utilizing microprint or other forms of printing that aredifficult to reproduce, thereby rendering the instrument, document, ornegotiable item difficult to reproduce or to create. Additionally, theitem may contain a paper or other backing material difficult toreproduce. In other cases, the item may contain holographs or otherfields making it further difficult to reproduce. In yet otherapplications, the item may contain inks that have radioactive isotopes,or magnetic qualities, or other properties that are difficult to detector to reproduce. In yet other applications the item may have strips ofmaterials or certain pigments imbedded internally that are identifiablebut difficult to reproduce. In general, numerous methods andmethodologies exist or have been proposed that render certain documentsor negotiable instruments difficult to reproduce. Such processeshowever, tend to be inherently difficult to implement, and, indeed, thedifficulty in creating the process is the counterfeiting preventivemeasure.

With optical characteristics determinations made in accordance with thepresent invention, improved methods of detecting and preventingcounterfeiting may be obtained. In accordance with the presentinvention, layers of pigment or other materials in the printing orsimilar process may be utilized that render items difficult toreproduce, but relatively easy to create and/or detect.

As previously described, various optical properties of an object may bemeasured, assessed or predicted in accordance with the presentinvention. Such optical properties include surface reflection,translucency of surface layers, gloss of the surface and the spectralproperties of semi-translucent layers on the surface and of the spectralproperties of layers below the surface. Such apparatus and methodologiescan be utilized to render printing or similar processes difficult toreproduce.

FIGS. 51A to C illustrates instrument 601 (which may be any of the itemspreviously discussed or other items needing counterfeit protection,etc.) that includes a number of layers of pigment or other material.Outer layer or layers (603) generally are semi-transparent ortranslucent or semi-translucent. Inner layer or layers 605 may be opaqueor semi-translucent. The layers are deposited by successively printingpigments (or painting or other deposition or application, etc.) onsubstrate 607, which may be any suitable backing material, such as paperor plastic or other materials, etc.

If light is reflected from the surface of instrument 601 it in generalwill exhibit certain optical properties which can be measured byconventional spectrographic or colorimetry techniques. The spectrum ofthe reflected light will be principally influenced by the surfaceproperties of outer layer(s) 603 and to a lesser degree by innerlayer(s) 605 and/or substrate 607, depending upon the degree oftranslucency of the various layers, etc. If the material is illuminatedfrom the rear, in general the spectral properties of the material willbe influenced by all layers of the material, and in general can be quitedifferent from the spectral properties of light reflected from the faceof the object.

Preferred embodiments herein provide an instrument and methodology thatcan distinguish surface reflection properties of an item/material frombulk spectral properties of the item/material, which can beadvantageously utilized for preventing/detecting counterfeiting. In suchpreferred embodiments, an instrument or item document includes substrate607 printed (or otherwise formed) with inner layer(s) 605 consisting ofa relatively long term (depending upon the particular application)stable dye or other pigment or material, and also includes outerlayer(s) 603, that preferably consist of a semi-translucent layerprinted or otherwise deposited or from inner layer(s) 605. It should benoted that such layer formation may be part of the overall process thatforms the instrument or other item, or it may be separate processes thatform layers 603 and 605 in a particular location or locations 609 oninstrument 601. In certain embodiments, layers 603 and 605 are formedfrom a fixed or predetermined position from a location marker alsoincluded on instrument 601. Such location marker may facilitate themeasuring of optical properties of such layers, as will be described,and may provide a further barrier in that the location of the positionwhere optical properties are to be assessed may not be known to anunauthorized person or device, etc.

Following the printing or other formation processes of layers 603 and605 (and drying or curing, etc.), the optical properties of instrument601 are quantified including, for example, the surface spectralproperties and the spectral properties of the inner layer. Such opticalproperties may be measured at a single or multiple locations. Suchspectral or other optical properties may be recorded and saved such asin a computer data base for future reference. To determine if thedocument or material is genuine, the spectral properties of instrument601, and in particular layers 603 and 605, are measured and compared tothe previously recorded measurements. Based on such comparisons, whichmay include a number of acceptance criteria (such as delta E values orother such thresholds or ranges), an assessment or prediction may bemade of whether instrument 601 is genuine or counterfeit.

In another such embodiment, inner layer(s) 605 may be printed/formedwith different layers of pigments that are changed from batch to batchor periodically, from time to time. The particular pigment forparticular instruments may be recorded and stored and may be identifiedto the particular instruments with a serial number or other form ofidentification. The pigments of inner and outer layers 603 and 605 maybe adjusted in order to insure that the instrument appears to have thesame color when visually inspected or when measured with traditionalspectrographic or colorimetry techniques. Thus, an entire series ofinstruments, materials or documents or currency can be printed/formedwhich visually appear the same, yet have internal or subsurfaceproperties that can be quantified utilizing the apparatus andmethodology disclosed elsewhere to uniquely distinguish the documents.

In another such embodiment, inner layer(s) 605 are printed/formed withpattern 611 (see FIG. 51C) such as a pattern utilized in a bar code. Thepigments of the inner and outer layers are chosen to render the innerbar codes difficult if not impossible to discern visually by utilizingconventional spectrographic or colorimetry techniques.

In yet another embodiment, inner layer(s) 605 are printed/formed withpattern 611 such as a bar code where the bar code utilizes not onlydifferences in the widths of the lines of the bars as a method ofstoring data in the pattern, but also where the bars themselves are ofdifferent pigments. In such applications, data for the bar code can beencoded in the bars themselves and in the color of the bars. If thematerial is layered as disclosed above, the bar data is difficult if notimpossible to discern, rendering it difficult if not impossible toreproduce. With such embodiments, individuals or institutions may createan “identifier stamp” or the like that uniquely identifies objects, withthe stamp consisting of a color bar code or other spectrally identifyingfeature or aspect. This could be combined, for example, with a visiblebar or other code, and with other information or bar code (or message),etc., that is discernible only with an instrument such as providedherein. In such embodiments, a subsurface bar code or spectralidentification may be provided, with or without a visible code, messageor data.

In yet another embodiment, inner layer(s) 605 are printed/formed withgeometric two dimensional patterns that can be discerned as describedherein by scanning the instrument, document or material, such as on twoor more axis. In yet another embodiment, inner layer(s) 605 areprinted/formed in multiple layers. Certain configurations of themeasuring apparatus may be constructed to principally measure specificlayers or thickness' of layers or spectral properties of layers. Thus,one measurement may produce one set of optical properties, while anothermeasurement produces yet another set of optical properties, and so onrendering the instrument, document or material even more difficult toreproduce.

Such embodiments may be applicable to a wide class of objects. Althoughthe foregoing discussion has focused on documents or negotiableinstruments of paper or plastic such as currency or checks etc., it isequally applicable as an identification to works of art or objects orprecious items or any material or object than can accept imprinting orother material preparation. Indeed, the quality of the printing of theoriginal object need not be highly controlled either in color or inprint quality. Since the imprint placed on the object is recorded bothspectrally and spatially after the imprinting process (either as linearor multi-axis measurements) and recorded, it renders the identificationmark difficult to reproduce.

Additionally, and particularly with respect to objects such aspaintings, sculptures, and the like, it may be possible to determineoptical properties as described herein in one or more locations, basedon the constituent layers of the object (i.e., without forming speciallayers 603, 605, etc.). In general, it may be possible to opticallycharacterize such objects, with optical characteristic data stored forlater comparisons to determine if the object is genuine or counterfeit.Still additionally, it may be possible to use specially formed innerlayers that include codes or other subsurface spectral characteristicsthat may be measured in accordance with the present invention, but whichwould not be discernible visually or by utilizing conventionalspectrographic or colorimetry techniques. In such embodiments, the outervisible characteristics may completely mask the subsurface code orspectral identifier, which may remain hidden except when assessed asprovided herein in order to detect for genuineness, etc.

As will be apparent to those skilled in the art, certain refinements maybe made in accordance with the present invention. For example, a centrallight source fiber optic is utilized in certain preferred embodiments,but other light source arrangements (such as a plurality of light sourcefibers, etc.). In addition, lookup tables are utilized for variousaspects of the present invention, but polynomial type calculations couldsimilarly be employed. Thus, although various preferred embodiments ofthe present invention have been disclosed for illustrative purposes,those skilled in the art will appreciate that various modifications,additions and/or substitutions are possible without departing from thescope and spirit of the present invention as disclosed in the claims. Inaddition, while various embodiments utilize light principally in thevisible light spectrum, the present invention is not necessarily limitedto all or part of such visible light spectrum, and may include radiantenergy not within such visible light spectrum.

As described above, in accordance with the present invention variousmethods, methodologies, implements and embodiments may be employed formeasuring the optical properties of teeth and other materials. Whilemuch of the description herein describes exemplary embodiments employinga probe with a central element serving as a light source, as willapparent to those skilled in the art principles, techniques andimplements in accordance with the present invention may be employed inother probe configurations. The following description discussesadditional exemplary embodiments, methods and systems for distinguishingthe optical properties of teeth and other materials and objects based onsuch previous principles, techniques and implements and enhancementsthereof.

Previously described exemplary embodiments preferably have utilizedprobes and methods with one or more source elements, preferably fiberoptics, and one or more receiver elements, also preferably fiber optics,in order to adjust spectral or other optical characteristics data forheight and angular changes resulting, for example, from not holding theprobe perpendicular to a surface or to irregularities in a surface. Inaccordance with other aspects and exemplary embodiments of the presentinvention, a central receiver element, also preferably a fiber optic,will now be described in more detail.

Referring now to FIG. 52, an embodiment of the present inventionutilizing probe 800 (illustrated in cross section) including centralreceiver 802 (preferably a fiber optic) surrounded by two rings 806 and810 of light sources (also preferably fiber optics). Rings 806 and/or810 in preferred embodiments are constructed of strands and/or a ring offiber optics. In alternate embodiments rings 806 and 810 are constructedof cylindrical light guides. FIG. 53 illustrates an embodiment of thepresent invention utilizing probe 812 (illustrated in cross section)including central receiver 814 (also preferably a fiber optic)surrounded by two rings of sources (preferably fiber optics) where theinner ring includes a plurality of sources or fiber optics 816 and 818,preferably six evenly spaced apart, and the outer ring includes aplurality sources or fiber optics 820, preferably twelve evenly spacedapart. As will be described in greater detail later, the use of tworings of light sources in such embodiments may be in used in accordancewith the present invention to provide a method for measuring theopalescence or other optical characteristics of materials or objects.

Consider a probe (such as probe 802 and/or 812) approaching a materialor object. As the probe approaches the surface of the material orobject, the intensity of light reflected from the material or object andreceived by a receiver will increase as the height from the objectdecreases. Eventually, at a peaking height the intensity will peak, andas the probe is lowered to the critical height the intensity will fallto a minimum. This phenomenon has been described in detail previouslyherein. In general, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art,this phenomenon does not depend on whether the central element is thelight source and the inner and outer rings are light receivers, or ifthe central element is the receiver and the inner and outer rings aresources. In both cases, the intensity received by a single or pluralityof receiver fibers varies with height. Similarly, the intensity receivedby a single or plurality of receiver fibers varies as the angle of theprobe changes from being normal to the surface. Additionally, if thesurface has irregularities, the intensity also will vary.

Among the advantages of utilizing a plurality of receiver fibers is thatcertain of the receiver fibers can be utilized to measure angle andheight, as previously described. An advantage of utilizing a singlereceiver is that the instrument requires only one lightreceiver/spectrometer detector. In accordance with other aspects of thepresent invention, however, methods and implements to quantify and/orcorrect for height and angle with a single receiver may also beprovided.

Referring again to FIG. 52, in addition to the two rings of lightsources, three monochrome sources 808 (preferably fiber optics)preferably are positioned in a ring between the two rings of lightsources. FIG. 53 illustrates three monochrome light sources 816positioned within the first ring. The number of monochrome sources andtheir precise locations are not limited to what is illustrated, andother arrangements are utilized in other embodiments for specificapplications. It has been determined, however, that three monochromesources may be advantageously utilized in many applications.

In accordance with such embodiments, monochrome sources 808 and 816 aresupplied with monochromatic or nearly monochromatic light thatpreferably is out of the band of interest. For color determination, theoptical band of interest is typically 400 to 700 nanometers. Mostspectrometers, however, such as those described elsewhere herein and/orCCD spectrometers such as those manufactured by Ocean Optics, aresensitive well into the infra-red light band. Thus, many spectrometersare capable of detecting light from 700 nanometers to 800 nanometers oreven longer wavelengths.

In preferred embodiments utilizing this aspect of the present invention,the three monochromatic light source fibers are each supplied withmonochromatic light of different wavelengths. One preferred way toprovide such monochromatic light is by utilizing three infra-red LEDs ofdifferent wavelengths, for example, or by filtering a white light sourcewith interference notch filters with different center wavelengths.

In one such preferred embodiment, a broad band white light sourcesupplies light to all light source fibers/light guides. Light suppliedto the three monochromatic light sources is filtered with narrow bandpass notch filters with center wavelengths greater than 700 nanometers.For example, one center wavelength may be 750 nanometers, while anothercenter wavelength may be 775 nanometers, and a third center wavelengthmay be 800 nanometers. It should be noted that the exact filterwavelengths are not important; it is only important that suchwavelengths be sufficiently different so that they do not overlap andmay be separately detected, as described herein. The other two rings oflight sources include, for example, a broad-band visible range filterthat passes light from 400 to 700 nanometers and rejects light in therange of the three monochrome filters. What is important is thebroad-band light sources preferably do not emit light in the frequencyrange of the monochromatic light sources, or at least do not emit lightin such frequency range to a degree that would interfere with thedetection of the monochromatic light as described herein.

As such a probe in accordance with the present invention approaches amaterial or object, receiver fiber 802 or 814 will receive visible lightand infra-red light as illustrated in FIG. 54. The visible lightpreferably is spectrally analyzed to determine the optical properties ofthe material or object, preferably as described elsewhere herein. Theanalyzed spectrum also will include light intensities at the threemonochrome source center wavelengths as illustrated in FIG. 54(illustrated as frequency band 824). The three intensities areindependent of each other and can be utilized to determine height andangle in a manner similar to that for the perimeter receivers aspreviously described.

Such a probe in accordance with the present invention preferably isnormalized to a standard material. If the probe is perpendicular to amaterial, the three out of band intensities should be equal. If theprobe is not perpendicular to the material they will differ such as isillustrated in FIG. 54. The difference in the intensities is a functionof the angle of the probe with respect to the surface of the material orobject and may be used to measure and quantify the angular change and toadjust the intensity of the visible region of the spectrum if desired,as described elsewhere herein. The intensity of the three out of bandintensities of the monochromatic sources also may be utilized todetermine or quantify the height of the probe as described elsewhereherein. The three intensities will demonstrate a peaking phenomena asdescribed earlier. It also should be noted that the visible band alsowill demonstrate a peaking phenomena and is utilized in certainapplications/embodiments to determine/quantify height as well.

In one alternate embodiment, the three monochrome sources are notfiltered and are supplied light with the same spectral properties as theinner and outer rings (the three sources in such embodiments may not bemonochrome, but may be broad-band). With such an alternate embodiment,the light sources may be alternately turned on and off in a mannersynchronous with the measurement of spectral data. As an exemplaryoperation of such an alternative, as the probe approaches a material orobject, the inner ring source may be turned on and a measurement ismade. The inner ring may then be turned off and the outer ring turned onand a measurement is made. Both inner and outer rings may then be turnedoff and the three monochrome (or broadband) sources are each in turnturned on and off as a measurement is made. The plurality of spectrumsor measurements are utilized to determine the optical properties of thematerial and to measure and/or adjust for height and angular changes inaccordance with previously described principles.

As will be understood from the previous discussion, the use of at leastinner and outer rings of light sources is to provide a method todetermine optical characteristics such as the opalescence ortranslucency of the material or object. Such inner/outer rings may beutilized in conjunction with the three monochrome or other light sourcesutilized to determine angle and height as described earlier. As will beunderstood from previous description, when the inner ring of lightsources is on it provides light to the material that is geometricallywithin a certain angular range. When the outer ring is on it provideslight that is geometrically at larger angles. If the material isopalescent, for example, a spectral shift will occur between the twomeasurements, thereby allowing such optical characteristics to bequantified.

Certain spectrometer systems can collect data at high data rates such ascertain spectrometers manufactured by Ocean Optics, Inc., which can havean integration time of 1 millisecond. In typical data gatheringapplications, the spectrometer is run at a high rate and the data issignal averaged over many samples to reduce noise. Such signal averagingtechniques are well known to those skilled in the art. In an alternateembodiment of the present invention, the three monochrome sources eachhave the same out of band wavelength. The inner and outer ring sourcesprovide light filtered or otherwise generated to include only thevisible band. The light provided to the inner and outer rings is gatedon and off as discussed above or one or the other rings is left on (butstill a plurality of spectral measurements preferably are taken). Thethree monochrome sources, however, are turned on and off rapidly,synchronous with the spectral measurements being taken at, for example,a rate of 1000 Hz. The visible band of the spectrum preferably aresignal averaged to reduce noise and the out of band sensors preferablyare utilized for angle and height determinations.

In another alternate embodiment of the invention, the monochrome lightsources and sensors are in band. The light provided to the inner andouter ring sources are notched to exclude a small portion of light atthe wavelengths of the monochrome receivers, such as is illustrated inFIG. 55 (see frequency band 826). With such embodiments, the monochromereceivers/sensors may be of different wavelengths as described earlieror may be of the same wavelength and pulsed on and off as describedearlier.

It should be noted that such aspects of the present invention may beapplied to embodiments with one or more light sources and/or with one ormore light receivers. The positions of the sources and sensorsillustrated in the figures is for illustration and discussion purposesonly. Such aspects of the present invention may be applied to anypositioning of the source and receivers consistent with the principlesdescribed herein. Although the present invention was disclosed forlight, such techniques may be applied to other measurement techniques aswell, such as acoustical imaging systems. With such embodiments, heightand/or angle determination, quantification and/or correction may beapplied to a variety of probe configurations, including a probe with acentral element, and including probes in which the central element is asource or a receiver, etc.

Yet other aspects of the present invention will now be described.

As previously described, certain embodiments of the present inventionmay be implemented through the use of a flexible cable assemblyconsisting of one or more fiber optics. As previously described, fiberoptics conduct light that is within a certain angular range oracceptance range of the fiber optic. The range of angles is quantifiedby designating a Numerical Aperture (NA) for a fiber optic, as describedelsewhere herein. It has been determined that the amplitude of lightpropagating within a fiber optic, and the spectral properties of thelight propagating within a fiber optic, changes as the fiber optic isbent over small radii. The degree of amplitude change, spectral shiftand angular shift in general depends upon the geometric properties ofthe fiber and the degree of flexing of the fiber. The above spectral,angular and amplitude shifting can affect spectroscopy measurements andoptical properties measurements in systems that utilize fiber opticcables.

One solution to such problems is to provide a cable that is held rigidor fixed to avoid flexing, such as the “hand held” embodiments of thepresent invention described elsewhere herein, where flexing of the fiberoptics is inhibited or prevented. Another solution is to provide asemi-rigid cable that can not be flexed over small radii. In someapplications such as dentistry, however, a semi-rigid cable may beundesirable or impractical. Thus, in accordance with other aspects ofthe present invention, techniques are provided to measure or quantifythe spectral, intensity and/or angular shift in such a cable and toutilize such a measurement to desirably affect the overall opticalproperties measurement.

FIG. 56 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention utilizingsuch techniques. Such an embodiment preferably includes a spectrometer,light sensors, a CPU or computer, a fiber optic cable and a probe, suchas in one or more embodiments described elsewhere herein. Cable 860 issuch a preferred embodiment and contains one or more source fiber optics(see source fiber optic 838) that provide light from the light source (apreferred arrangement is illustrated as lamp 830, hot mirror 832, glassrod 834 and iris 836, such as previously described) to the material orobject being measured and one or more receiver fiber optics that receivelight reflected or returned from the material or object and serve toprovide light to the spectrometer and/or light sensors. Variousembodiments of such a spectrometer and/or light sensors have beendescribed elsewhere herein. In addition, details of exemplary cableconstructions and methods also have been described elsewhere herein.

A cable in accordance with such preferred embodiments includes one ormore additional fibers. Included is at least one additional sourcefiber, hereinafter referred to as the secondary source fiber orcable/lamp drift source fiber (see fiber 840), and one or moreadditional receiver fiber(s), hereinafter referred to as secondaryreceiver fibers or cable/lamp drift sensor fibers (see fibers 848, 850,854 and 855). Such secondary source fiber and secondary receiver fiberspass down the length of cable 860 parallel to the other fibers (seefibers 838, 846 and 844) in the cable, and the secondary fibers arejoined at probe end 862 in portion 864 that includes diffusing cavity866, preferably a small diffusing cavity such as previously describeherein. Diffusing cavity 866 serves to cause light provided by secondarysource fiber 840 to be presented to secondary receiver fibers 848.Secondary receiver fibers 848 provide a light path from diffusing cavity866 to one or more secondary light sensors (see, e.g., sensors 852 and858). Fibers 844 and/or 846 preferably pass to optical sensors forpurposes of taking spectral or perimeter measurements, as describedelsewhere herein.

Preferably, one of the secondary light sensors is a spectrometer formeasuring the spectrum of the light source (or some portion of thespectrum of the light source) after it passes over the length of thecable and back through the cable (see, e.g., filters 856 and sensors858, implementing one type of spectrometer, such as previously describedelsewhere herein). Another of the light sensors preferably is a “wideband” sensor pair which consists of two or more sensors 852 that arepositioned to measure the radial distribution of light in a secondaryreceiver fiber optic. The details of such a spectrometer for measuringthe spectrum of the light source and for adjusting the spectral or otheroptical characteristics data of such a system in accordance withembodiments of the present invention have been described elsewhereherein. The details of such a “wide band” sensor that measures theangular distribution of light within a fiber optic have also beendescribed elsewhere herein.

In accordance with such embodiments, the spectrum of the secondaryreceiver fibers is measured and saved as part of a normalization process(e.g., with the cable in an unflexed or known flexed condition, etc.;e.g., a first degree of flex). The intensity and angular distributionpattern of the secondary receiver fiber(s) similarly are measured andsaved as part of the normalization process. As the system is utilizedfollowing the normalization process, the spectrum and angulardistribution of the lamp and secondary receiver fibers are monitoredwhile other system measurements (e.g., spectral measurements asdescribed previously) are being taken. In general, if the secondaryspectrum and angular distribution do not change, the cable has not beenflexed. If, however, there is a change in such parameters, either thelamp spectral properties (including angular distribution such as causedby heating of lamp elements or apertures or infrared filters, etc.) haschanged, or the cable has been flexed (e.g., to a second degree of flex,different from the first degree of flex) or otherwise changed to adegree to produce a detectable change. Such changes may thus be measuredand monitored.

By providing additional sensors to monitor the lamp source directly suchas described herein, it can be determined if the cable is being flexedor if the lamp and/or lamp hardware are changing. In certainapplications it may not be necessary to determine which is changing(e.g., either cable flexing or lamp drift), but to simply monitor theoverall system drift/changes and adjust the measurements to compensatefor drift or to reject the measurements if the system has drifted out ofcalibration. Such use of normalization data and monitoring of the lampand cable, etc., is used in preferred embodiments to compensate, andaccept or reject, spectral or other optical characteristics data takenin accordance with the present invention.

It should be noted that such embodiments may be used, for example, as astrain gauge or as an instrument to measure if the curvature in a systemis changing (see Apparatus and Method for Detecting Curvature filed oneven date herewith by the inventors hereof, which is hereby incorporatedby reference). In addition, such embodiments may be applied to one ormore secondary source fibers and one or more secondary receiver fibers.Such embodiments also may utilize a plurality of secondary source andreceiver fibers and a plurality of diffusing cavities distributed alongthe length of a cable assembly to quantify not only whether or not acable is being flexed (and to measure and quantify the degree offlexing), but at what point or approximately what point in the cable theflex is occurring.

The secondary source fiber optic also may be provided by the primarysource fiber optic utilizing mirrors or the like, or by notching thesource fiber and providing a small amount of light to the secondaryreceiver fibers. What is important in such embodiments is that a portionof the light from the primary source fiber be controllably provided tothe secondary receiver fiber(s). Additionally, in a system with aplurality of secondary receiver fibers, one secondary (or primary)source fiber may be utilized to provide sufficient light to allsecondary receiver fibers in order for flex determination/quantificationpurposes in accordance with the present invention. The secondary sourcefiber may alternately have a light source different from the primarysource fiber, and separate correction factors may be accordinglydetermined for the lamp and for the cable flexing.

It also should be noted that the diffusing cavity optionally may bereplaced by a single fiber that serves both as a secondary source andsecondary receiver fiber by looping the fiber optic back in the probe(or creating an equivalent of a fiber or optic loop). In accordance withsuch optional embodiments, two strands of fibers run the length of thecable and serve as a secondary source fiber and a secondary receiverfiber.

In an alternate embodiment, no additional fibers are added to the probebut a mirror such as a hot mirror is mounted or positioned near the endof the probe permitting light of certain frequencies, preferablyfrequencies that are out of the visible band, to be reflected/returnedfrom one or more primary source fibers to one or more primary receiverfibers. The out of band light frequencies preferably are detected bysensors with notch filters that reject in band light frequencies asdiscussed earlier herein and that are primarily sensitive to flexing ofthe cable.

Again, what is important is that a secondary receiver fiber (orequivalent return optical path) couple light to optical sensors so thatspectral or other changes due to cable flexing and/or lamp drift or thelike may be determined and/or quantified, with such flex and/or lampdrift-type data available for correction or further quantification ofoptical characteristics data in accordance with the present invention.

Still other aspects of the present invention will now be described.

FIG. 57 illustrates one or more systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N havingprobes 874A, 874B . . . 874N, preferably constructed and operated inaccordance with previously described embodiments, each of which isadapted to include a modem (illustrated as modems 872A, 872B . . .872N). The modems may be a part of, or coupled to, the CPU, computer orother processing unit included as part of systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N(the use of CPUs, computers or other processing units as part of suchsystems is described elsewhere herein).

In accordance with such embodiments, under user initiated or othersoftware control (such as a periodic call-in determined by softwaretiming/real time clock algorithm, boot-up algorithm, etc.), one or moreof systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N is coupled effectively to lab 884.Illustrated in FIG. 57 is an illustrated embodiment in which systems870A, 870B . . . 870N are coupled via modem connection to web page 878,which for illustrative purposes is maintained on internet serviceprovider (ISP) node 876. Lab 884 may include node 876, or lab 884 may becoupled to node 876 through a dedicated, dial-in or other connection.What is important is that systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N are able tocoupled to a central electronic point that is a part of, or accessibleby, lab 884. Lab 884 in this embodiment serves as a location forpurposes of monitoring, controlling, servicing, etc., one or more ofsystems 870A, 870B . . . 870N, as will described. In a typicalapplication, lab 884 may be a part of, or working in conjunction with,the entity that manufactures, maintain, services or operates systems870A, 870B . . . 870N, etc., or uses such systems as part of anindustrial process, examples of which are described elsewhere herein.

It should also be noted that the use of a web page and internetconnection is illustrative only. As illustrated by connection 882, theconnection between lab 884 and one or more of systems 870A, 870B . . .870N may be made directly between the system(s) and lab 884, such as bymodem or other electronic connection, either direct or over some widearea or other network.

In accordance with such embodiments, systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N maybe electronically coupled to lab 884, which preferably is remotelylocated from one or more of the various systems. In one embodiment, lab884 is able to convey operational commands to one or more of thesystems. In one aspect of the present invention, one or more of systems870A, 870B . . . 870N receive commands initiating a diagnostic or testmode, in response to which the system executes a diagnostic routine thatgenerates diagnostic data (indicative of the operational status, failuremode or other diagnostic type data), which may be coupled to lab 884 bythe electronic connection. In other aspects, during normal operation,one or more of the systems periodically capture and store operationaldata, such as lamp characteristics, calibration or normalization data orthe like. The periodic storing of such operational data may be softwareinitiated and/or controlled based on time (e.g., number of lamp orsystem operating hours), measurements, boot-up or initialization orother triggering event. Upon periodic or other connection to lab 884,such operational data may be transferred to lab 884 for evaluation,analysis, statistical processing and/or storage. In one such embodiment,lab 884 stores a history of such operational data for statistical ordiagnostic purposes, such as for initiating a service call for thesystem, advising or predicting a need for a future service call (such aslamp, filter or other component replacement or repair). As an exemplaryapplication, lab 884 monitors such operational data for key components(such as a light source) over time, and using stored data, look-up tableor algorithm predicts remaining life of the component. Thereafter, lab884 may send data or commands to one or more of systems 870A, 870B . . .870N in order to have a suitable diagnostic, service call, informationalor other message displayed on the system and/or a computer coupled tothe system. In still other refinements of such embodiments, lab 884 mayalso generate an internet or other electronic message to a person orentity providing a status report or other data with respect to theparticular system being monitored, diagnosed, controlled, etc.

In accordance with such embodiments, lab 884 may also use such anelectronic connection to download software upgrades or othermodifications to one or more of systems 870A, 870B . . . 870N. Asexemplary uses, such software upgrades may consist of bug fixes or newreleases of application, operating system, shade guide data or othersoftware. In accordance with other aspects of the present invention,normalization or other data files (such as normalization, calibration orother files determined by the particular application, or filescontaining parameters controlling or used in a signal processing orfiltering algorithm or the like) may be utilized by the system to makemeasurements or control decisions (for example, in one of the industrialapplications described earlier), with such data files being upgradableor reconfigurable by under software control, which may be done remotelywith a remote electronic connection as described earlier.

As a particular example, one or more of the systems may output shadeguide values, such as for a dental application. In the event that new orupdated shade guides are released, new or updated shade guide values maybe electronically transferred to the one or more systems, therebyreducing downtime of the instrument, physical service calls or the like.Similar, in certain industrial applications, files indicative of orcorresponding to particular materials or objects being opticallycharacterized may be electronically downloading to one or more suchsystems (e.g., files that assist such a system in characterizing,identifying or sorting materials or objects that are being processed ina industrial, manufacturing or inventorying process, etc.). Inapplications in which constituent materials of a material or object arebeing predicted (either the material or object being opticallycharacterized or a second material or object to be produced based on thematerial being optically characterized), files indicative of orcorresponding to such constituent materials may be electronicallydownloading (also including recipe formulas and the like).

In accordance with another such aspect of the present invention, two ormore systems may be coupled to lab 884, either in a simultaneous(parallel) or sequential (serial) manner in order to have either thesame or different data files, software or other information to the twoor more systems, such as for facilitating operation of the two or moresystems that is synchronized in some manner (such as downloadingcalibration, normalization or other data files that enable or facilitatea more synchronized or corresponding operation between or among the twoor more units).

It should also be noted that systems in accordance with the presentinvention may internally store operational data or other informationsuch as for key components (e.g., light source) and predicting failureor a need for replacement or servicing of the component, with anappropriate message or alarm provided to a user. Monitoring theoperating characteristics or duration of operation, etc. for keycomponents may thus be implemented without being coupled to a remotelab.

Aspects of the present invention relating to calibration of systems inaccordance with the present invention will now be described withreference to FIG. 58.

In certain applications, it may be desirable to calibrate system 888,which may optionally include modem 898 or other communication device, bydirecting probe 890 towards color or other standard 892. Measurementstaken as probe 890 is directed towards, or in proximity to, standard 892may then be captured and stored and used to normalize, calibrate orotherwise adjust spectral measurements taken by the system. Inaccordance with certain preferred embodiments, such a calibration stepis performed prior to measuring each object or material, or series ofobjects or materials.

It also is contemplated by the present invention that as probe 890 is inthe process of being moved relative to standard 892 sensors 894 detectthe position of probe 890 with respect to standard 892 or a commonphysical reference point. Using sensors 894, a series of calibration ornormalization measurements may be taken at determined positions relativeto standard 892, with such positional information available fornormalization or other adjustment of spectral or other measurementstaken by the instrument.

Arrow 896 denotes that the motion of probe 890 with respect to standard892 is a relative motion, and either the probe or the standard may bemoved with respect to the other. In certain embodiments, probe 890 isretained in a fixed position, and standard 892 is moved towards probe890 in a controlled manner, while sensors 894 similarly detect andprovide information indicative of the relative position of the probewith respect to the standard. Standard 892 may be controllably moved bya servo motor or the like in order to provide the desired, controlledrelative movement between the probe and the standard. If system 888includes modem 898 or the like, a remote lab or operator may initiate,control, monitor and/or receive data from the calibration ornormalization process in a manner similar to that described inconnection with FIG. 57.

In conjunction with various of the foregoing embodiments, a variety ofoptic fibers may be utilized, with smaller fibers being used to assessoptical characteristics of smaller spots on the object or material underevaluation. In accordance with such aspects of the present invention andwith various of the embodiments described herein, fibers of about 300microns in diameter, and up to or less than about 1 millimeter indiameter, and from about 1 to 1.5 millimeters have been utilized,although fibers of other diameters also are utilized in otherembodiments and applications of the present invention. With such fibers,the optical properties of the object or materials under evaluation maybe determined with a spot size of about 300 microns, or alternativelyabout 1 millimeter, or about 1.5 millimeters, or from about 0.3 to 1millimeters, or from about 1 to 1.5 millimeters. In accordance with suchembodiments, optical properties of such a spot size, including spectral,translucence, opalescence, gloss, surface texture, fluorescence,Rayleigh scattering, etc., may be quantified or determined, including bydetermining a plurality of spectrums as the probe is directed towards orin contact or near contact with the object or material and possiblechanges in such spectrums, all with an instrument that is simplydirected towards a single surface of the object or material underevaluation.

It also should be noted that, in accordance with various principles ofthe various embodiments of the present invention described herein,refinements may be made within the scope of the present invention.Variations of source/receiver combinations may be utilized in accordancewith certain embodiments of the present invention, and various opticalproperties may be determined in accordance with the various spectraobtained with the present invention, which may include spectra taken atone or more distances from the object or material (and includingspectrally reflected light), and spectra taken at or near the surface(e.g., within the critical height, and substantially or wholly excludingspectrally reflected light). In certain embodiments, measurements may betaken in a manner to produce what is sometimes considered a goniometricmeasurement or assessment of the object or material under evaluation. Inother embodiments, features may sometimes be used with or withoutcertain features. For example, certain applications of aspects of thepresent invention may utilize perimeter fibers for height/angledetermination or correction, while other applications may not. Suchrefinements, alternatives and specific examples are within the scope ofthe various embodiments of the present invention.

Various other features, embodiments, alternatives, etc., in accordancewith the present invention will now be described.

As previously described, various devices, systems, methods, andmethodologies for measuring the optical properties of teeth and othermaterials may be obtained in accordance with the present invention.Various embodiments herein utilize a spectrometer and other opticalsensors. Particular preferred embodiments previously describedpreferably utilize light-to-frequency converters such as the TSL230sensor manufactured by Texas Instruments. Such embodiments include manyunique and/or advantageous properties. As will be understood based onthe disclosures herein, one such property is that the precision of themeasurements for each spectral band may be independent of lightintensity within the band. As a result, for example, the more bluebands, which typically have the lowest light intensity, may be measuredwith the same precision as the more red bands, which typically have thehighest light intensity (please see the prior description of embodimentsutilizing the TSL-type sensors).

Alternative embodiments may utilize linear or matrix charge coupleddevice (CCD) technology or other linear and/or matrix optical sensors asa spectrometer system (exemplary alternative embodiments are describedelsewhere herein). It has been determined, however, that utilizing CCDor other linear or matrix sensors may present certain problems anddisadvantages. One such difficulty is that the light sensitivity oflight in the more blue bands is considerably less than the lightsensitivity or intensity of light in the more red bands. The reducedsensitivity is due to the nature of the sensing elements and also due tothe spectral properties of the light source and the spectral propertiesof the light conduction elements. It is not unusual in spectrometersystems, particularly in reflectance-type systems, for the blue systemsensitivity to be several orders of magnitude less than the redsensitivity. Thus, if the spectrometer system is constructed with alinear or matrix array where the light receivers intensity is outputserially to an analog to digital converter (ADC), then the range of theADC and the precision of the ADC must be large enough to accommodate thehigh red light sensitivity (or else the system will saturate renderingthe measurement invalid) and it must also be precise enough to permitthe low sensitivity elements to have sufficient gain to make qualitymeasurements. For example, if the red intensity and sensitivity is 128times the blue intensity and sensitivity, then in general the bluereadings will automatically have a precision that is 128 (2⁷) times lessthan that for red. If, for example, a 16 bit ADC is utilized andproviding 2¹⁶ levels of gray, then the maximum level of gray for blue is128 times less or (2⁽¹⁶⁻⁷⁾) or only 2⁹ levels of gray. In general, if a10 bit ADC is utilized, blue will only have eight levels of gray, etc.

One approach in certain spectrometer systems, particularly thoseutilized for reflectance measurements, has been to optically normalizein order to flatten the spectral response. This may be done, forexample, by reducing the intensity of the red light input to thespectrometer with filters or mirrors or the like, such as interferencefilters, to reduce the intensity of red light on the sensors and forcethe red intensity to be within the range of the blue sensors. Thedisadvantage of such systems is that it causes the noise level of thered sensors to be increased to the noise level of the blue sensors sincethe signal from the red sensors is reduced, requiring an increase inoverall system gain, hence the system noise is forced to the level ofthe lowest sensitivity input.

In accordance with other alternative embodiments of the presentinvention, improved spectrometer-type systems may be produced. FIG. 59is a block diagram of one such alternative embodiment. As illustrated,linear (or array) optical sensor 900, which preferably includes anoptical manifold that receives and directs light of a given wavelengthto appropriate sensing elements provided in linear optical sensor 900.Optical manifolds that direct light of a given wavelength are known inthe art and may be constructed, for example, of diffraction gratings oroptical filters (such as the optical manifolds and implements of thetype described elsewhere herein). The output of linear optical sensor900 passes through variable gain amplifier 906, to sample and holdamplifier 908 and to analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 910. Suchvariable gain amplifiers, sample and hold amplifiers and ADCs are knownin the art and are sometimes available as a single unit. It is desiredthat the ADC have the desired precision and that the overall systemprovide for the speed required for the particular application.

In the illustrated embodiment, system timing is controlled by timinggenerator 902, coupled to computer 904 (which also preferably receivesdata from ADC 910). Timing generator 902 optimally controls linearoptical sensor 900 (or CCD or other linear sensor, etc.) to integrate ameasurement and to output it to variable gain amplifier 906 and sampleand hold amplifier 908 and ADC 910. Timing generator 902 also preferablycontrols the analog output of linear optical sensor 900 to serially stepfrom one sensor to the next in a controlled and desired manner.

In accordance with such embodiments, variable gain amplifier 906 is alsocontrolled by timing generator 902 and/or computer 904, and preferablythe gain of variable gain amplifier 906 is varied step by step and,preferably, uniquely for each sensor in the liner optical sensor 900.Thus, in accordance with such embodiments, the gain corresponding to agiven first (e.g., red) element may be different than the gain for agiven second (e.g., blue or green) element under control of timinggenerator 902 and/or computer 904. In accordance with such embodiments,the full (or substantially all of the) range of ADC 910 thus becomesavailable for each sensor, and timing generator 902 and/or computer 904can normalize or cause the overall system sensitivity to be flat overthe entire spectral range.

In certain embodiments, timing generator 902 is controlled by a computeror microprocessor or is a microprocessor such as a RISC processor suchas a Hitachi SH2 or SH3 processor. In such embodiments the gain ofvariable gain amplifier 906 is variable dynamically by the processor asspectral measurements are being made. It also should be noted that suchembodiments preferably utilize a linear-type array sensor, although suchembodiments also may utilize matrix-type sensor elements or individualelements as well. What is important is that the sensing elements beprovided with suitable gain for the light intensity presented to theparticular sensing elements, etc.

Yet other alternative embodiments in accordance with the presentinvention will now be described.

As described previously, embodiments in accordance with the presentinvention typically utilize a spectrometer and/or other optical sensors.The measurements preferably were made while the probe was in motion withrespect to the material being measured—either the probe was moving, thematerial was moving, or both. In accordance with such embodiments, it isdesired that both rapid and precise measurements be made over the entirespectral range.

Making rapid spectral measurements with precision typically has beendifficult or impossible to do because a spectrometer that can make rapidmeasurements typically consists of a plurality of light sensors, eachmeasuring a small spectral region or band simultaneously in a parallelfashion, as opposed to an apparatus consisting of one optical sensorthat measures spectral bands in sequence or serially one after theother. In general, an instrument that measures spectral bands in aparallel fashion can produce N times as many measurements per unit timeas an instrument making serial measurements, assuming that the spectralreceivers in both instruments are equivalent. In either case, whetherthe apparatus has many simultaneous sensors or one sensor makingmultiple measurements, in general the more rapid the apparatus operates,the shorter the integration time per spectral band, and hence the lowerthe precision of the spectral measurement.

In accordance with other alternative embodiments of the presentinvention, the precision and/or sampling rate of such spectrometers maybe increased.

As described elsewhere herein, in accordance with preferred embodimentsthe spectral properties of materials may be measured as a probe movesinto contact with or into proximity with an object. When the probe isfar from the object, the total light energy received is small, and as itis moved towards the object the optical energy increases and eventuallypeaks and decreases as the probe is moved still further towards thematerial. In alternative probe designs, the light energy may not peakbut may rise to a maximum as the prove is moved into contact or nearcontact with the material. In either case, peaking or not, as the probemoves relative to the material the total spectral energy received willvary.

Certain materials exhibit properties such as opalescence or pearlesencewherein the spectral reflectance curve is a function of angle ofincidence and angle of reflection. Other materials (perhaps mostmaterials) have consistent spectral reflectance curves that are notfunctions of angle (at least for angles within a limited range ofangles). What does vary, however, for virtually all materials is thevalue or gain of the spectrum as a probe moves relative to an object.When the probe is far away the value will be low, and as it nears theobject the value will increase. In many cases the value or gain willvary by orders of magnitude while the spectral shape or chroma will varyrelatively little.

In accordance with alternative embodiments, it has been determined to beadvantageous to measure the value of a spectrum for a probe movingrelative to a material at a high rate (or at a first rate high enough to“freeze” the value at a precise location or range of locations), whileit is only be necessary to measure the chroma at a second, lesser, rateand hence with higher precision.

FIG. 60 illustrates a preferred exemplary implementation of such anembodiment of the present invention. Such an embodiment preferablyincludes a reflectance-type probe having at least one light source andat least one light receiver element (examples of such probes and lightsources/receivers are described elsewhere herein; FIG. 60 illustratesfor discussion purposes only light receiver 912). Light receiver 912couples received light to optical splitter 914, which couples receivedlight to spectrometer 916 and also to wide band (value) sensor 918. Inaccordance with such embodiments, spectrometer 916 (which may be of adesign/type described elsewhere herein) preferably measures the spectralproperties of the received light as a function of optical wavelengthover a band range such as the visible band (400 nm to 700 nm). Wide bandsensor 918 preferably measures the light energy over a wide band, andpreferably over the same total band as spectrometer 916.

Without being bound by theory, if V is the measurement of value/wideband sensor 918, and R(λ) is the reflectance response of the material asa function of wavelength, then for static measurements or measurementswhere V and R(λ) are made at the same rate:$V = {{\int\limits_{band}{{R(\lambda)}{\mathbb{d}\lambda}}} = {\sum_{bands}{R(\lambda)}}}$

Value/wide band sensor 918 in general will always have an intensity muchhigher than the intensity of any of the individual spectral sensors ofspectrometer 916 since it measures the light intensity over a broad bandof wavelengths. Hence if the chroma of the spectrum varies slowly (suchas a function of angle), it is possible to measure the spectrum at arate much less than the rate of the Value sensor, thus improving theprecision of the spectral sensors. Preferably, however the value of thespectral sensors is adjusted to account for the variation in value dueto the movement of the probe/material, or the reflectance spectrumshould be adjusted by a gain factor G where:$G = \frac{V}{\sum\limits_{bands}{R(\lambda)}}$and hence the adjusted reflectance spectrum with improved precision is:R _(a)(λ)=G·R(λ)

As will be appreciated, in accordance with such alternative embodimentssensors and means are provided to measure value at a first, preferablyfaster rate, and chroma at a second, preferably slower rate, in such amanner to make more precise and overall rapid measurements.

Still other alternative embodiments of the present invention will now bedescribed.

As previously described, various devices, systems, methods, andmethodologies for measuring the optical properties of teeth and othermaterials may be obtained in accordance with the present invention. Inpreferred embodiments, an instrument with a spectrometer and with “wideband” optical sensors is utilized. In general, the spectrometer measuresoptical intensities over narrow optical bandwidths, while the wide bandsensors measured optical intensities over wide band width, typicallyover the entire visible spectrum.

An alternative embodiment in accordance with the present invention willnow be described. As illustrated in FIG. 61, optical sensor 920consisting of a spectrometer (narrow band sensors) and wide band opticalsensors are provided. Optical sensor 920 preferably consists of CCD(charge coupled device) 926 (or similar optical sensing device) formeasuring light intensities, and CCD timing, control and digitizingelectronics 928 for converting the analog output of CCD 926 into digitalform (such as may be input into a computer or microprocessor or otherdata recording or analyzing device as described elsewhere herein). CCDsand the electronics for controlling and digitizing their output areknown in the art.

In accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the optical elements ofCCD 926 preferably are covered by optical filters 922 and 924, whichpreferably consists of one or more filter plates. Such a filter platepreferably is constructed of interference filters which pass light of apredetermined frequency and reflect light that is out of band.Interference filters are known in the art. In the preferredimplementation of such embodiments, a portion (922) of the interferencefilters pass light with a narrow band width, while another portion (924)of the filters pass light with wide bandwidth. Thus, certain of thesensors in CCD 926 may serve to detect narrow band width light, whileother of the sensors may serve to detect wide band width light. Thus,the output of CCD 926 preferably may include both the elements of aspectrometer and also the elements of a plurality of wide band sensors(which may be advantageously utilized as described elsewhere herein).

In an alternate such embodiment of the invention, CCD 926 may be coupledto diffraction grating 932 as illustrated in FIG. 62. Diffractiongratings such as diffraction grating 932 are known in the art and havebeen utilized extensively with CCD-type sensors. In an embodiments suchas illustrated in FIG. 62, however, diffraction grating 932 covers (orprovides diffracted light to) only a portion of CCD 926, allowing theremainder of the sensing elements of CCD 926 to be available for aplurality of wide band sensors (e.g., to receive from wide band filters924).

Referring now to FIG. 63, additional aspects of yet additional preferredembodiments of the present invention will now be described. FIG. 63illustrates a splitter or splitting type arrangement for fiber optics inorder to deliver light in a suitable and desired manner tofilters/optical sensors. Exemplary filter and optical sensorarrangements are described elsewhere herein. It will be appreciated bythose of skill in the art that such splitting arrangements to bedescribed hereinafter may be utilized in lieu of the various diffusingcavities and optical splitters, etc., described elsewhere herein. Suchsplitting techniques may be utilized in accordance with embodiments ofthe present invention to separate the light from a single fiber opticinto multiple fiber optics for the narrow and wide band channels inspectrometer systems such as those described elsewhere herein. In otherembodiments, some of which are described in greater detail elsewhereherein, other splitter/diffusing cavity/manifold arrangements areutilized to deliver light to sensors and filters/sensors in order toimplement spectrometer systems and various methods as described herein.

In accordance with embodiments of the present invention, various probeconfigurations may be utilized, some of which consist of a central lightreceiver surrounded by one or more rings of light sources and oradditional light receivers, which preferably may consist of fiberoptics. The central light receiver preferably is utilized to couplereceived light to narrow and wide band optical filters to separate thelight into discrete bands within the desired spectral range. In certainpreferred embodiments, the light is separated within the visiblespectrum into, for example, 15 narrow bands (20 nm wide) and 1 wide band(300 nm wide) for a total of 16 channels. In other embodiments, othernumbers of filters/bands are utilized, and of course filters targetingparticular lines (e.g., Raman-type spectroscopy) or narrow or wideregions of interest also may be utilized.

As will be appreciated from description elsewhere herein, light beingpropagated by such a central light receiver fiber optic has certainangular and radial patterns that in general are preserved as the lightexits the fiber optic and enters into the diffusing cavities or otheroptical implement. As also will be appreciated, however, it is desirablethat all channels of a spectrometer type instrument “see the same light”from the central receiver fiber to maintain the linearity of thespectrometer system. In accordance with additional preferred embodimentsof the present invention, additional methods of and implements forsplitting the light from one receiver/fiber optic into multiple lightstreams/fiber optics are provided that serve to reduce the angular andradial light patterns within the spectrometer system.

One such additional preferred embodiment is illustrated in FIG. 63. Asillustrated, such an arrangement/method of splitting the light from onereceiver/fiber optic 940 (which may be a central receiver or anon-central receiver, and may be one of a plurality of receivers/fiberoptics) into multiple light streams/channels 944A utilizes notches 944(or ports) placed into splitting element/fiber optic 942 at specificpoints where it is desirable to have light exit (e.g., positioned wherelight may be coupled to optical sensing elements, etc.). In theillustrated embodiment, notched/ported splitting element/fiber optic 942may be optically coupled to a central or other fiber, or the central orother fiber could be one continuous fiber from the probe end to thespectrometer illustrated in FIG. 63. As an illustrative example of atype of notched/ported optical implement utilized in such embodiments,reference is made to notched fibers made by Poly-Optical under the tradename OptiGlo. If notches/ports 944 are the same size in the fiber, thenin general the light may exit the fiber optic with different intensitiesat the notched points. In such embodiments, blue filters preferably areutilized at the higher intensity notches/ports to compensate for thelower system throughput in the blue range of the spectrometer system. Amethod in accordance with such embodiments includes determining theintensity levels of the various notches/ports of such an opticalimplement or manifold and determining an order from highest intensity tolowest intensity, and then selectively mapping or corresponding filtersto the notches/ports in the determined order, such as from bluest toreddest, respectively, or perhaps placing narrow band or line-typefilters of spectral bands of particular interest at notches/ports ofhighest intensity, etc.

As illustrated in FIG. 63, light exiting from notches/ports 944 may becoupled to light sensors 947. In the illustrated preferred embodiment,the light is coupled to sensors 947 through lens 941, filter 943 andlens 945. Filters 943 can be cut-off, interference or other filters asdescribed elsewhere herein (e.g., to cover a desired spectral band orbands, and may include neutral density filters, etc.). Lens 941 and 945preferably constitute GRIN lens and/or other lens of a type to assist incollimating or otherwise directing light from notches/ports 944 tosensors 947. As will be understood from description elsewhere herein,certain sensors may receive light without filters or through separatereceivers (e.g., sensors for determining height or angle, etc.).

Alternate methods/implements for splitting light from one fiber intomultiple fibers or paths are used in other embodiments. Certain of suchalternatives are illustrated in FIGS. 64 and 65, which utilize largediameter fiber optic light pipes. FIGS. 64 and 65 illustrate two suchexamples, although it will be apparent from the description herein thatother combinations of fiber pairings are possible and utilized in stillalternative embodiments.

With reference to FIG. 64, light receiver fiber 948 (0.040″ diameter inthe illustrated alternative preferred embodiment), which may be acentral or other receiver directly or indirectly received from a probe,is optically joined or coupled to bundle 949 (#1), which preferablyconsists of 14 smaller diameter fibers (0.010″in the illustratedalternative preferred embodiment). The fibers in bundle 949 preferablyare divided into 2 bundles of 7 fibers, bundles 950A (#2) and 950B (#3),with the fibers of bundle 949 being divided such that, for example,every other fiber in the 2 rings (inner ring of 4 and outer ring of 10)are separated into bundles 950A and 950B (the black and white coloringof the fibers of bundle 949 illustrate one such division or splitting).Such a splitting of the fibers serves to remove or reduce any angularand radial light patterns that exist within the light receiver fiber948. As will be appreciated, a bundle of smaller diameter fibers (suchas 0.001″ fibers) could also be utilized in accordance with suchembodiments.

The fibers from bundles 950A and 950B preferably are positioned (andoptically coupled) within the center of respective rings of 6(preferably 0.030″diameter) fibers to form 0.090″diameter bundles 954A(#5) and 954B (#4) as illustrated. Bundles 954A and 954B are eachjoined/optically coupled to larger diameter fiber optics 952A and 952B,which serve to conduct the light to bundles 956A (#7) and 956B (#6),which preferably consist of 7-0.030″diameter fibers.). A common centralfiber C preferably is utilized in bundles 956A and 956B to couple thelight back into large diameter fibers 952A and 952B.

With the illustrated embodiment, 24 separate fiber optics for providedfor separate filter/sensor channels. In the illustrated preferredembodiment, 16 channels are utilized, with certain of the fibers beinggrouped (to e.g., to provide more than one fiber per filter/sensorchannel, such as 2 or 3 fibers per channel as illustrated), which servesto increase the light intensity to some of the channels (e.g., for thebluer channels, which, for example, may receive light from 3 fibers,while the redder channels receive light from 1 fiber, while intermediatechannels receive light from two fibers). This is illustrated in FIG. 64by fibers 953B, which are coupled to 2 filter/sensor channels in groupsof 3 fibers, fibers 953A, which are coupled to 3 filter/sensor channelsin groups of two fibers, and fibers 957A and 957B, which are coupled to10 filter/sensor channels with single fibers; fibers 957C illustrateanother pair of fibers coupled to a filter/sensor channel. As will beappreciated, other combinations and groupings may be utilized tosplit/divide light to filter/sensor channels, with some of thefilter/sensor channels receiving greater light than other of thefilter/sensor channels, etc.

FIG. 65 illustrates another alternate embodiment, in which center fiberC of bundles 956A (#7) and 956B (#6) is from the ring of fibers ofbundles 954A (#5) and 954B (#4), as As illustrated, fiber optic 948couples light into bundle 949. Bundle 949 is divided into bundles 950Aand 950B; bundle 950A is combined with fibers 953A and 955A to formbundle 954A which is coupled to fiber optic 952A; bundle 950B iscombined with fibers 953B and 955B to form bundle 954B which is coupledto fiber optic 952B. Fibers 953A, 953B, 957A and 957B are coupled tofilters and sensors as illustrated in a manner as described previously.

As will be appreciated, the concept of utilizing bundle #1 joined to apreferably central light receiver fiber and being split into two bundles#2 and #3 can also be implemented with notched fiber optics or multiplediffusing cavities as described elsewhere herein. Such implements areutilized in alternative embodiments of the present invention.

Referring now to FIGS. 66-70, further embodiments of the presentinvention will now be described.

As described elsewhere herein, in accordance with preferred embodimentsof the present invention devices and methods for measuring the color andother optical properties of teeth and other materials may be provided.In at least certain of such embodiments, a probe preferably consistingof a bundle of fiber optics may be utilized to illuminate the object ormaterial being measured and to detect light reflected or otherwisereturned from the object or material. The fibers were either sourcefibers (those providing light to the object or material) or receiverfibers (those used to detect light returned from the object ormaterial). Generally, and as described elsewhere herein, receiver fiberswere utilized in a plurality of ways. Some of the fibers served as angleor height detectors and provided light to broad band optical sensors.Other fibers served as spectrometric detectors and provided light to aspectrometer for spectral or color analysis.

In certain embodiments the probe consisted of a bundle of fibers with aplurality of fibers serving as receiver fibers providing light to anabridged spectrometers where each receiver fiber provided light to anoptical band pass filter and to an optical sensor. In other embodiments,a single fiber optic provided light to a spectrometer where the lightfrom the single fiber was split into many optical filters and sensorsserving as an abridged spectrometer. In other embodiments, several (twoor three or more) fibers served as spectral optical sensors and wereeach split into two or more optical paths providing light to a pluralityof optical filters and optical sensors.

When measuring spectrums, it generally is desirable to measure lightintensities over narrow optical bands with a plurality of opticalsensors and optical band pass filters. The resolution of the system isdetermined by the bandwidth of the optical filters and sensors. Thus,when measuring the color of objects or materials it is customary tomeasure the optical intensity of the reflected light over the visibleband (400 to 700 nm) and to divide the band into three or more opticalreceivers, where the greater the number of receivers, the greater theresolution of the system. For color measurement, it is customary todivide the optical band into 15 or more receivers to obtain spectralresolution of 20 nm or finer resolution.

The optical band may be spectrally divided by refraction (prisms),diffraction (such as diffraction gratings or slits) or by optical bandpass filters such as interference or other bandpass filters. Typicaloptical sensors are linear sensors such as MOS or CCD detectors orphotodiodes or photodiode arrays. Independent of the method ofspectrally dividing the light into narrow band spectral components andpresenting the narrow bands to optical receivers, the efficiency of eachoptical receiver in general is wavelength or color dependent. Inaddition, the efficiency of the optical splitting technique is alsocolor dependent. Thus, the optical sensor measuring blue light from 400to 410 nm, for example, will have a different efficiency than theoptical sensor measuring red light from 660 to 670 nm.

As a result, the value measured by the blue sensor will be different andtypically less than the value measured by the red sensor, and for colorcomparisons and measurements the system must be normalized to areflectance standard. Thus, the gain given to the blue sensor will bedifferent than the gain given to the red sensor and so on for eachspectral optical sensor. The process of normalizing the system istypically referred to as “calibrating” the system and is often done withtwo or more reflectance standards (white and black, for example,providing a white level threshold and a black or minimum levelthreshold). In some implementations, it also may be desirable toadditionally calibrate on gray standards to linearize the sensors andoptical system.

When a single fiber optic provides light to a plurality of opticalsensors (with or without optical band pass filters), it is importantthat the light traveling in the fiber optic be evenly distributed toeach optical sensor, or that the angular distribution of light providedto each sensor remain static or unchanged from its calibration state.For example, consider a system where a single fiber optic provides lightto a red sensor and to a blue sensor. The system is calibrated bymeasuring the reflected light from reflectance standards and isnormalized by adjusting the gain of each sensor to cause the finaloutput to match the reference material. The system may then be utilizedto measure unknown materials and to determine their color by comparingthe results to those from the reflectance standards. In such a system itis assumed that measuring a blue material will result in the normalizedblue value exceeding the normalized red value and that measuring a redmaterial will result in the normalized red value exceeding the bluevalue. If, however, the angular distribution of light (independent ofcolor) changes for the unknown material compared with the referencematerial, then false measurements result.

Consider an example where 50% of the reflected light from a whitereference material is provided to both the red and blue sensors (halfthe light to the red sensor and half the light to the blue sensor) andthe system is calibrated. After calibration, the light value output ofthe system will be the same for both the red and blue sensors (thedefinition of “white”). Now consider measuring the color of another“white” material, where the surface of the new material differs from thereference material and where the surface of the material causes 40% ofthe light to be directed to the blue sensor and 60% of the light to bedirected to the red sensor. The resultant measurement will indicate ahigher red value than blue value and will falsely report that the newmaterial is red when in fact it is white.

It has been determined that any optical system where light is split andprovided to a plurality of sensors for spectral analysis requires thatthe angular distribution of light provided to the sensors in generalremains unchanged. Thus, in a spectrometer system consisting of adiffraction grating and CCD linear sensor array, for example, the lightis split by diffraction into a plurality of sensors. The sensors at the“blue” end of the spectrum measure the intensity of blue light and thesensors at the “red” end measure the red light. The amount of “blue”light diffracted by the diffraction grating to the blue sensors comparedto the amount of light diffracted to the red sensors will vary dependentupon color and will also vary dependent upon how the light isdistributed as it is presented to the diffraction grating. If theangular distribution of light varies from sample to sample, falsemeasurements may result.

Integrating spheres are known to be employed to evenly distribute lightto color sensors in spectrometer systems. The interior of integratingspheres generally are coated with a diffuse material with a reasonablyhigh coefficient of reflectivity that is independent of wavelength orcolor. As light enters the sphere and undergoes multiple reflectionswithin the sphere, the light tends to become evenly distributed (becausethe surface is diffuse) within the sphere and tends to evenly illuminatean exit port. Integrating spheres, however, are inherently inefficient.In order to distribute light evenly over the exit port, multiplereflections within the sphere are required. Each reflection has loss andthus the more evenly the light is distributed, the more attenuated itbecomes.

Furthermore, it is not believed to be theoretically possible toconstruct an integrating sphere that is consistent for all light angulardistribution patterns. For example, if collimated light enters sphere960A through entrance port 961A, as illustrated in FIG. 66A, a certainportion of the light will exit port 962A with only one internalreflection and thus will be presented to spectrometer sensors 963A witha high intensity. If the same amount of light enters sphere 960B throughentrance port 961B at a different angle as illustrated in FIG. 66B wherethe majority of light now requires two or more reflections to exit port962B, the light will then be presented to spectrometer sensors 963B at alower intensity. In this example, the spectrometer will minimally recorda lower value. If the sensors forming the spectrometer are angulardistribution sensitive as well, then false spectral or chromatic resultslikely will occur as well.

It is known (including in accordance with certain embodiments of thepresent invention) to construct spectrometer systems utilizinginterference filters and optical sensors. Such filters may be individualfilter elements and individual optical sensor elements, or theinterference filter may be a linear filter over a linear array sensor asdescribed elsewhere herein. Interference filters generally pass“in-band” light and reflect “out of band” light. Interference filtersmay thus be utilized as mirrors reflecting light of certain wavelengthsor may be utilized to transmit light of different wavelengths. Thus,interference filters may serve as efficient optical elements by passing“in-band” light to optical sensors and reflecting “out of band” light toother filter/sensor elements in the system. Such interference filterassemblies may be considered multiplexing filters and are believed tohave been used in some form in infra-red optical communications systems(i.e., a field of endeavor different from that of color/spectralmeasuring systems).

In accordance with the present invention, multiplexing filters also maybe implemented for visible light utilization and may thus beincorporated as part of a spectrometer system. FIG. 67A illustratesmultiplexing filter/sensors 964 in conjunction with integrating sphere960 receiving light through entrance port 961. An array of opticalsensors are included with multiplexing filter/sensors 964 to form anoptical spectrometer. FIG. 67B illustrates a spectrometer systemconsisting of integrating sphere 960 receiving light through entranceport 961 and discrete interference filter elements and sensors 966 (sixare illustratively shown). Both systems are essentially equivalent inprincipal although they differ in construction. In either system, lightenters entrance port 961 in sphere 960 and undergoes multiple internalreflections and eventually (if not attenuated first) strikes a filterelement. The “in-band” light is transmitted through the filter andreceived by its corresponding sensor. The “out of band” light isreflected by the filter and is thus returned to the system where it caneventually be transmitted by a filter supporting the light wavelength.Thus, when white light is incident upon a blue filter the blue light istransmitted to the blue sensor and the remaining green and red light arereturned to the system where they can subsequently be detected by agreen or red sensor rather than being rejected or absorbed by the bluefilter. Hence the light sensitivity of the spectrometer systemdramatically increases.

Consider, for example, a spectrometer system constructed of threefilters, (red, green and blue) where the incident light is evenlydivided and presented to each filter which detects “in-band” light andrejects “out of band” light. Each filter/sensor thus can only at bestreceive ⅓of the light. If the system has 30 sensors, each filter candetect only {fraction (1/30)} of the light or 3.3% at best. Utilizing amultiplexing filter may thus greatly increases the system efficiency.Although the utilization of interference filters in a multiplexingsystem increases system efficiency, such an implement also suffers fromangular distribution irregularities. Referring again to FIGS. 67A and67B, light entering the system undergoes multiple internal reflections,including reflections from the interference filters. Each reflectionfrom the coating of the integrating sphere, however, attenuates thelight intensity. Furthermore, the reflections from the interferencefilters causes additional loss, and are at best only 80% or soreflective for out of band light rays (often it is much lower). Thus, ifthe system is calibrated for example where light enters the system andfirst strikes the blue filter and later (after several reflections andattenuations) strikes the red filter, it likely will output a spectralresponse that is significantly different than a situation where the samelight intensity and color is input with a different angular distributionpattern that first strikes the red filter and later strikes the blue.

In accordance with other preferred embodiments of the present invention,a spectrometer system is provided that has higher efficiency and that issignificantly more insensitive to the angular distribution of the sourcelight. FIG. 68 illustrates one such preferred embodiment of the presentinvention. It consists of a plurality of interference filters andoptical sensors (972, 972A, 972B, etc.), and a fiber optic or otherinput and optical collimating elements 970. In preferred embodiments,the optical collimating elements consist of GRIN (gradient index)lenses, although in alternative embodiments aspherical lenses areutilized. As illustrated, optical collimating lenses 970 preferably areutilized in the optical path between each of the interference filtersand optical sensors in order to more desirably collect light over abroad range of incident angles and to collect the light into a smallarea and to present it to an interference filter. In accordance withthis embodiment, substantially all of the light, independent of angulardistribution being presented to the spectrometer, may be presented tofirst filter/optical sensor 972. Light that is “in-band” is transmittedby the interference filter in first filter/optical sensor 972 andpresented to its corresponding optical sensor. Light that is “out ofband” is reflected by the filter in first filter/optical sensor 972 andis presented to a second optical collimating element 970, which again inpreferred embodiments is a second GRIN lens. The light is then presentedto a second interference filter in second filter/optical sensor 972A,which in general is different from the first interference filter offilter/optical sensor 972, that also transmits “in-band” light andpresents it to an optical sensor and reflects “out of band” light andpresents it to a third collimating element 970.

In accordance with such embodiments, each interference filter and sensorpreferably is constructed to transmit to the sensor and detect a certainrange of light wavelengths and reflects others, and interference filtersare selected/manufactured so as to cover the optical band of interest.As will be appreciated from the discussion herein, the number offilters/sensors and their optical transmission and reflectioncharacteristics determine the resolution of the spectrometers.

In such a preferred embodiment, substantially all of the light inputinto the spectrometer is presented to the first sensor. Substantiallyall the light reflected from the first filter/sensor is presented to thesecond filter/sensor, and then to the third filter/sensor and then tothe fourth filter/sensor and so on to the last filter. Thus, losses thatoccur in the system will generally be consistent because the number ofreflections occurring before each optical element is controlled. Thus,the first filter/sensor will have substantially all of the incidentlight available to it, the second filter/sensor will have only one priorreflection and thus a controlled loss, the third filter/sensor will haveonly two prior reflections and so on until the end of the system. Insuch an embodiment, the filters preferably are arranged in a manner thattends to flatten the spectral response of the system. In the preferredembodiment, first filter/sensor 972 is the shortest wavelength, secondfilter/sensor 972A is the next shorter and so in order of increasingwavelength on to the last filter/sensor. Since the sensitivity ofoptical sensors is typically much less for blue light than for red, inaccordance with such embodiments the blue filter is first and ispresented with higher intensity light than the red.

FIG. 69 illustrates another preferred embodiment in which a relay-typefilter is constructed with mirrors and interference filters. Asillustrated, mirrors 974 preferably are on one side of a linear arrayand filters/sensors 972, 972A, 972B, etc., are on an opposite side.Mirrors 974 preferably are implemented to reflect and collimate light asefficiently as possible and have a nominal but distorted parabolicshape. Light enters the system through entrance 968 (preferably throughcollimating element 970, which may be as previously described, and isreflected and collimated by a first mirror 974 and presented to a firstfilter/sensor 972. Light reflects from the first interference filter toa second mirror 974 and is again collimated and reflected to a secondfilter/sensor 972A and so on until the last filter/sensor.

FIG. 70 illustrates another preferred embodiment. This embodimentpreferably consists of a series of fiber optical elements 971 thatpreferably support total internal reflection for angles greater than thecritical angle. Optical elements 971 preferably are implemented in azigzag pattern and have interference filters 973 deposited asillustrated. Light entering the system through entrance 968 is directedto first interference filter 973, then to second filter 973A, then tothird filter 973B, and so on until the last filter. As will beappreciated and as previously described, associated with each suchfilter may be an optical sensor as described previously to sense thelight passing the through the filter, which may thus be sensed and usedto analyze the light, etc.

As previously discussed, in accordance with the present invention, thecolor and other optical properties of teeth and other materials may bemeasured with various types of spectrometers. Such spectrometers weredisclosed, for example, to consist of filters that separate light intonarrow wavelength bands and preferably light to frequency converteroptical sensors (or other sensors) that measured the intensity of lightin each separated optical band. Other preferred embodiments will now bedescribed that utilize an optical manifold and interference filters toimplement a spectrometer that has small size and high throughputefficiency. The optical properties of light to frequency converters suchas the Texas Advanced Optical Systems (Previously Texas Instruments)TSL230 have been discussed previously. The optical properties ofinterference filters have also been described earlier and the advantagesof utilizing light to frequency converters with interference filters asa part of a spectrometer system have also been described earlier.

FIG. 71 is a block diagram of such another preferred embodiment. Lightis input preferably via non-coherent light guide 974 and wide bandoptical notch (blocking) filter 975 and input into optical manifold 976.From optical manifold 976, light is coupled to interference filters 977(optionally through optical mask 978) and optical sensors 979(preferably light to frequency converter optical sensors), the outputsof which are read via RISC processor 980 (or other processing element,gate array, etc.), which may communicate externally via input/output981. Non-coherent light guide 974 serves to diffuse the light enteringthe spectrometer (in other embodiments, other light diffuser or mixerelements are utilized). In certain optical applications the light beingspectrally analyzed may have axial or radial distribution patterns thatcould affect the intensity of light passing through the filters to theoptical sensors. As the distribution pattern changes, the intensity oflight presented to the filters could change and thus affect the spectraloutput produced by the spectrometer.

FIGS. 72 and 73 illustrate further details of a non-coherent light guidethat may be used in such embodiments. Non-coherent light guide 974preferably is implemented with a bundle of small fiber optic fibers thatare fused or otherwise held firmly in position at each end of lightguide 974. The numerical aperture of the fibers in the bundle are chosento have a large numerical aperture or an acceptance angle at least aslarge as the light entering the system. Referring to FIG. 72, the fibersin the bundle are fused or held in place with an adhesive or otherfasteners at end A, and are randomized in mid portion 974A of lightguide 974 and are fused or held in place at end B.

FIGS. 73A and 73B illustrate, respectively, an example of ends A and Bof non-coherent light guide 974. In the illustrated example, nineteenfibers are used. Typically 100 or more fibers would be utilized,although for discussion purposes nineteen are shown to illustrate howthe fibers at end A are randomized in the mid section and are in adifferent geometrical location at end B (the present invention is notlimited to any particular number, although numbers greater than 50, or75 or 100 are believed to provide satisfactory results). Thus, lightincident at End A with a radial and axial distribution pattern will exitthe light guide at end B with a randomized or diffused light pattern.

Interference filters have been described previously. In general,interference filters are constructed of thin films of materials ofdiffering dielectric constants in a manner in order to pass light ofcertain wavelengths or light that is “in band,” reflect light that is“out of band” and absorb a (preferably small) portion of the incidentlight. The number of thin film layers and their constituent materialsdetermine the transmission, absorption and reflection properties.Interference filters also preferably are utilized with blocking filtersthat block out of band light such as the IR and UV light in a visibleband spectrometer. The blocking filters are typically absorption filtersand add to the overall thickness of the interference filters. In theillustrated preferred embodiment of the invention, one blocking filteris utilized at the entrance of the optical manifold as illustrated inFIG. 71. Thus, the individual interference filters 977 illustrated inFIGS. 71 and 74A and 74B do not each require blocking elements, and thuscan be very thin.

FIGS. 74A and 74B illustrates further details of one side of anexemplary optical manifold 976. Optical manifold 976 preferably isconstructed of an optical grade material such as quartz that has a lowcoefficient of absorption. One edge of optical manifold 976 includesentrance port 968 that preferably is optically bonded to the blockingfilter. In certain embodiments or applications, the blocking filterlimits the light to the visible band, 400 to 700 nm. In otherembodiments or applications, the blocking filter limits the light tocertain IR wavelengths. As will be appreciated based on the discussionherein, such a use of a blocking filter may be utilized to limit thelight wavelengths incident upon the interference filters and eliminatesecondary transmission such as IR light in a visible band spectrometersystem.

Optical manifold 976 preferably is mirrored on all sides and includesentrance port 968 and a plurality of exit ports/windows 978A. In thepreferred embodiment, exit ports/windows 978A are square openings(non-mirrored regions) on one side of the manifold as illustrated inFIGS. 74A and 74B. In certain preferred embodiments, all of the exitports/windows are of uniform shape and size, whereas in other preferredembodiments the exit ports/windows are of non-uniform shape and/or size.In an illustrative example, as illustrated generally by the dotted lineof exit port 978B, certain of the exit ports may be smaller than otherexit ports. As an example, if the optical throughput/sensitivity of thesystem is higher as the wavelength increases (redder portions of thespectrum), then exit ports corresponding to the higher wavelengthfilters may be of smaller size, while relatively larger size exit portsare used for the lower wavelength (bluer portions of the spectrum)filter portions. Thus, the exit port size for particular spectral bandsmay bear an inverse relationship with the optical throughput/sensitivityfor particular spectral bands.

In preferred embodiments, the interference filters are deposited overthe exit ports and are deposited as a series of layers covering the exitports. In such embodiments, certain layers are common to many of theexit ports; others are unique to certain exit ports. In accordance withsuch preferred embodiments, the interference filters in the system aredeposited on the optical manifold in layers with vacuum depositionand/or sputtering techniques in a series of layers with masks that covercertain filter elements in some deposition steps and that cover othersin other deposition steps, resulting in filters with the desired opticalproperties for each exit port. In an alternate embodiment of the presentinvention, the interference filters are deposited as a wedge filtercontinuously on the optical manifold. Wedge filters have layers ofvarying thickness, that vary continuously from one end to the other andconsequently pass light of different wavelength continuously from oneend of the filter to the other. The wedge filter may thus deposited onthe manifold including over the exit ports/windows, which again may beof uniform size/shape or of non-uniform size/shape, as describedearlier.

Without being bound by theory, a general principle of operation of suchan optical manifold in accordance with the present invention will now beprovided. Light enters the manifold at entrance port 968 after passing(preferably) through a non-coherent light guide that diffuses the lightand after passing (preferably) through a blocking filter that absorbslight that is out of band or out of range of the spectrometer (asdescribed elsewhere herein). The “in band” light then enters the opticalmanifold and reflects from the mirrored walls of the manifold withminimal loss. Eventually, the walls of the manifold either absorb thelight or it strikes one of the interference filters. If a light ray(photon) is within the transmission band of the filter it exits themanifold through the filter. If it is out of band, the filter eitherabsorbs it or it is reflected back into the manifold cavity. Eventually,all the light is either absorbed by the manifold, the filters or exitsthe manifold through the filters. The light exiting the manifold throughthe filters will have a narrow wavelength band determined by the opticalproperties of the filters.

As is understood, the optical properties of interference filters aredependent upon the angle of incidence of light rays. In general, thetransmission wavelength bandwidth increases for increasing angle ofincidence. In the optical manifold shown, light can be incident on thefilters at any angle of incidence. Thus the light exiting the filterswill cover a broad spectral band. In alternative preferred embodiments,to limit the angles of incidence of light passing through the filtersand subsequently narrow the bandwidth of light detected by the sensors,an absorbing spacer preferably is inserted between the exit ports of themanifold and the optical sensors.

FIG. 75 illustrates a detail of such a spacer. Spacers 978B have anaperture (hole) that is positioned between the manifold exit ports andoptical sensors 979. The thickness of spacer 978B and the size of theaperture determine the maximal angle of light that can pass through thefilter and be incident upon optical sensor 979, thus limiting the rangeof angles of light that pass through the filter and are detected by thesensors. As described elsewhere herein, the sensors may consist of lightto frequency converters outputting pulses that are coupled to a RISCprocessor, gate array or other logic or processing element(s), etc.

Although optical manifolds such as described in accordance with thepreferred embodiments generally may be inexpensive to construct,alternative embodiments may provide increases in efficiency. Forexample, and without being bound by theory, optical losses may occurwhen light is absorbed in the manifold walls and when light is absorbedin the interference filters and also light is absorbed in the spacer.

FIGS. 76A and 76B illustrate optical manifold (side and bottom view,respectively) that preferably is molded of an optical grade materialthat has lenses 976A molded (such as of a poly-optic material, quartz,or other suitable material) on the side (or multiple sides) that alsomay desirably utilize interference filters such as described elsewhereherein. The interference filters preferably are deposited over theconvex portion of lenses 976A. The rest of the manifold (except theoptical entrance port) preferably is mirrored. In accordance with suchembodiments, the light desirably is collimated or at leastsemi-collimated as the light exits the curved portion of the opticalmanifold and thus may be presented to the interference filters withinthe angular tolerance of the filter. In other aspects, generally theoptical manifold operates in the same manner as the manifold describedearlier.

FIG. 77 illustrates such an optical manifold positioned above and bondedto light sensors 979, which preferably are light to frequency convertersensors. As illustrated, manifold 976 includes entrance port 968 (lightmay be provided through a diffuser, non-coherent light guide, blockingfilter, such as describe earlier), mirrored surfaces 976B, lenses 976C,deposited interference filters 977, and sensors 979 positioned andoptically bonded in a manner to receive light from manifold 976 throughan appropriate interference filter 977, etc.

FIG. 78 illustrates alternative optical manifold 976 that is constructedof two optical materials with different indexes of refraction. Such anoptical manifold preferably is constructed with a low index ofrefraction material 976D and has concave recesses as illustrated. Moldedinto the concave recesses of the manifold material 976D are lensesconstructed of a high index of refraction material 976E. The convexinterface between the two materials, as viewed by a light ray incidentupon the interface from within the manifold, tends to cause the lightrays striking the interface to be semi-collimated when they pass throughor reflect from interference filters 977. Hence (again without beingbound by theory) the optical interface causes light rays strikinginterference filters 977 to be within an acceptance cone similar to theoptical manifold of the previously described embodiments. In suchembodiments as illustrated, however, all light rays (or a desirably highpercentage of light rays) striking interference filter 977 are withinthe acceptance angle and are not lost by absorption in a spacer, and maybe detected by sensor 979.

FIG. 79 illustrates optical manifold 976, that may include lensessimilar to the manifold illustrated in FIG. 78. The embodimentillustrated in FIG. 79, however, preferably is constructed of two parts.A first part 976F defines optical cavity 976I with entrance port 968 atone side that is hollow and that is mirrored on the interior (see, e.g.,mirrored inner surface 976G). Cavity 976I, generally, tends to act as aminiature integrating sphere. The second portion defining cavity 976I,illustrated as cavity bottom 976K, preferably is a lens plate withaspherical lenses 976J on one side and interference filters 977preferably deposited on the opposite side. The regions between thelenses preferably are mirrored to cause optical reflection back into thecavity. The bottom portion of the manifold preferably is bonded to thetop portion with a suitable adhesive. The operation of the manifoldillustrated in FIG. 79 generally is the same as the other manifoldsdescribed above, although such a manifold may be easier to constructunder certain situations. Also as illustrated, such an optical manifoldalso may utilize mirrored baffle 976H that helps to ensure that alllight undergoes at least one reflection from the sides of the manifoldand also limits the amount of light that might potentially exit theentrance port.

Still other preferred embodiments utilizing, preferably, light tofrequency converter-type optical sensors, interference filters,absorption filters, and non-coherent light guides will now be described.FIGS. 80A and 80B illustrate a block diagram of a spectrometer inaccordance with such alternative embodiments. Such a spectrometerpreferably consists of round to line non-coherent light guide 980,optical manifold 976 with interference filters 977, light to frequencyconverter optical sensors 979 (other type sensors also may be used) andRISC processor 981 (other processing elements also may be used). Asdescribed in greater detail elsewhere herein, with such a spectrometerin accordance with the present invention, light preferably may bepresented to manifold 976 via light guide 980. Manifold 976 includesexit ports/windows (and may include lenses, etc.) as described elsewhereherein, and light may pass from manifold 976 through filters 977(preferably interference filters) and be detected by sensors 979(preferably light to frequency converter type sensors). Details andalternatives of such a spectrometer are described elsewhere herein. Inthis embodiment, as illustrated, filters and optical sensors arepresented to two sides of a preferably rectangular manifold structure.Light detected by sensors 977 generated outputs, which may be processedby processor 981. Input/output may be made to processor 981 byinput/output circuitry 982, which may include (such as describedelsewhere herein), components of a computer, display, keyboard orswitches or other input, etc. Such components optimally may be installedon a small printed circuit board 983 or other appropriate substrate,etc.

FIGS. 81 and 82A and 82B illustrate details of an exemplary round toline non-coherent light guide. In accordance with the illustratedembodiment, light guide 980 preferably is constructed of small diameterquartz fiber optic fibers fused into round end 980A and randomized intoline end 980C, preferably through a length 980B of fibers including arandomized fiber bundle. Such a round to line non-coherent light guideserves as the light input into the spectrometer and in addition servesto remove any axial or radial light patterns that are present in thelight being spectrally analyzed. The significance of axial and radiallight distribution patterns in the light being spectrally analyzed havebeen described elsewhere herein. In accordance with such an embodiment,the smaller the diameter, and therefore the greater the number of fiberoptic fibers utilized in the light guide, the better the light diffusionwill be into the spectrometer. For illustrative purposes, only nineteenseparate fiber optic elements are illustrated in FIGS. 82A and 82B,although in alternative embodiments a greater or lesser number of fibersare utilized in such a randomized manner.

Round end 980A of exemplary non-coherent light guide 980 may be coupledto one or more other fiber optic fibers 984 (such as those from areceiver element of a fiber optic probe, as described elsewhere herein)by lens elements 985 (such as aspheric or GRIN lenses) to reduce thenumerical aperture of the light entering the spectrometer. In addition,optical notch filter 986 may be included to block/absorb undesirablewavelengths such as prior to the non-coherent light guide, asillustrated in FIG. 83. Alternately round end 980A of non-coherent lightguide 980 may be utilized as the light receiver in a spectrophotometerprobe design such as described elsewhere herein. The optical notchedfilter in such alternative embodiments may be inserted betweennon-coherent light guide line end 980C and optical manifold window 976.

FIGS. 84A and 84B illustrate a preferred optical manifold utilized insuch embodiments. In the preferred embodiment, optical manifold 976preferably utilizes a substrate, for example, of optical grade quartzwith a low coefficient of absorption (in other embodiments, polymericoptical materials or other suitable materials are utilized). Top, bottomand ends 976G of the substrate preferably are coated with mirrorcoating, preferably a first surface mirror coating. The topsidepreferably has optical slit window 987 for light entrance into manifold976. The two remaining sides preferably have interference filters 977deposited or otherwise formed or positioned thereon. In an exemplarypreferred embodiment, for example, there are eight (or another suitablenumber) of interference filters 977 per side. This produces an opticalmanifold with a dual step linear variable filter arrangement, asillustrated (this concept can be extended to a number of sides, such asfour or even five or six, etc.). The preferably light to frequencyconverter sensing elements 979 preferably are optically bonded to thefilter sides of optical manifold 976. Line end 980C of non-coherentlight guide 980 preferably is bonded to optical manifold 976 with anoptical adhesive, preferably having a similar index of refraction asquartz (or other constituent material of the manifold) to minimizelosses at this optical junction.

FIG. 84B illustrates an exemplary array of filters 977, which include aplurality of filter elements 977B (covered the desired band(s) ofinterest), which are formed, preferably to extend along the entire (orsubstantially entire) width of optical manifold 976, and may end includemirrored sides 977A (which may physically consist of the mirrored sidesof optical manifold 976). To minimize the overall physical size of sucha spectrometer, filters 977 preferably are formed on manifold 976, butalternatively could be formed on sensors 979, such as by deposition.What is important is that the filter be formed in a manner (either onmanifold 976, on sensors 979, or separately) so that the three elementsmay be physically arranged in a compact manner (manifold with exitport/window, filter and sensor, etc.). Of course, as will be understood,manifold 976 may be formed in two or more parts, and may include lenses,baffle mirrors, or the like, such as described elsewhere herein.

In an alternate design for the optical manifold substrate, threeabsorption filter glasses (preferably one long pass 976S and two shortpass 976T), such as those manufactured by Schott Glass TechnologiesInc., are optical bonded together with long pass absorption filter 976Sin the center and a short pass absorption filter 976T on each side, asillustrated in FIGS. 85A and 85B (top and front views, respectively). Inaccordance with such embodiments, such a multi-part substrate serves toabsorb out of band UV and IR light. As previously described, the top,bottom and sides preferably are coated with first surface mirrors andpreferably have interference filters formed thereon, such as previouslydescribed.

For further understanding of such embodiments, and without being boundby theory, FIG. 86 illustrates light rays passing from light guide 980to optical manifold 976 through filters 977 to sensors 979.

As will be appreciated from the foregoing, such preferred embodimentsenable low cost, small form factor spectrometer and spectrometer-basedsystems that may be used to measure the optical properties of teeth andother materials in an accurate and rapid. Stability, high speed andintensity (gray scale) resolution, in addition to low cost, small size,stability, lifetime and manufacturing simplicity, all may be achievedwith such embodiments. Additional description will now be provided withrespect to such exemplary preferred embodiments.

The preferred sensing elements, although not required in allembodiments, are light to frequency converters, as described previously.A light to frequency converter, without being bound by theory or thelike, is an optical sensor that produces a TTL output PWM signal. Theoutput frequency of the sensor is directly proportional to the intensityof light incident upon the sensor. Since its output typically is or maybe a TTL type signal and is a single lead, multiple sensors can easilybe utilized in a spectrometer design with minimal additional components.A single (or multiple) gate array or RISC processor can measure theoutput of, for example, 30 or more sensors simultaneously at high datarates (1000 samples per second or more) and with high gray scaleresolution, 2¹² or more bits or 0.025% and higher. Furthermore, thedesign may operate on either 3.3 volts or 5 volts and may be implementedin essence with no analog components. The entire spectrometer designpreferably may consist, for example, of one gate array or RISC or otherprocessor, the sensors, optical filters as part of an optical manifold(or as otherwise formed as described herein), and a PC card orhybrid-type or other substrate to hold it all together. It furthermorehas no optical minimal size limitation (unlike diffraction gratingspectrometers), rather it has a minimal size determined primarily by thesizes of the sensors and RISC or other processing element. The entiresystem, optics and electronics can be packaged in the size of aconventional IC PAL.

In accordance with such embodiments, a variety of miniature abridgedspectrometers may be implemented. Such spectrometer typically maycontain the following elements (as described in greater detail elsewhereherein): optical input diffusing and (optional) blocking elements;optical manifold and filters; electro-optical sensors; RISC or otherprocessor; digital input and output data bus; and clock oscillator (maybe external).

FIG. 87 illustrates another preferred embodiment of such aminiaturizable spectrometer. Light enters the spectrometer through inputport 968A. The light preferably passes through optical diffusing element974 (which may be a non-coherent light guide or other diffusingimplement or material, such as described elsewhere herein, cloudyquartz, mirrored material with multiple, mirrored randomly orientedsurfaces with multiple reflections, etc.) that randomize and diffuse thelight to remove axial or radial distribution patterns that may or maynot be present in the input light signal. The light then preferablypasses through blocking filter 975 that limits the spectral wavelengthsto the visible band, 400 to 700 nm. The light then enters opticalmanifold 976. Optical manifold 976 serves to distribute the light,preferably evenly, to optical notch filter elements 977 (preferablyinterference filters). Optical manifold 976 preferably has mirroredsides that permit multiple internal reflections within the interior ofthe manifold with minimal absorption loss. The notch filter elementspreferably are interference filters that are deposited over exit portson one or more sides of the optical manifold. Optical manifold 976 maybe thought of as serving as a miniature integrating sphere. Multipleinternal reflections occur on the walls of the manifold. In such apreferred embodiment, light reflects from the walls and eventually iseither absorbed by the walls or it strikes one or more interferencefilters deposited on the exit ports. The exit ports are regions on theoptical manifold that are not mirrored. Similarly, the optical entranceport is not mirrored.

As is known in the art, interference filters are constructed fromdeposited thin film layers having differing dielectric constants. Unlikeconventional designs, however, in such preferred embodiments theinterference filters are either deposited on the manifold or a componentof the optical manifold as described herein (or alternatively by beingdeposited on an array of optical sensors, etc., also as describedelsewhere herein). Without being bound by theory, the layers serve tophase shift light as it passes through the multiple layers; the numberof layers, the thickness of the layers and the material utilized for thedeposition process determine the degree of phase shifting that occurs asthe light attempts to pass through the filter; the degree of phaseshifting is additionally dependent upon the wavelength or color of thelight. Interference filters may be constructed to pass light withvarying band pass or band rejection properties.

In general an interference filter either passes “in band” light,reflects “out of band light” or absorbs light. Consequently,interference filters typically appear as mirrors when viewed with thenaked eye. Thus, when an “in band” light ray reflecting from the wallsof the optical manifold is incident upon an interference filter, it maypass through the filter and exit the manifold through an exit port. Ifan out of band light ray is incident upon an interference filter, thenit will be reflected back into the manifold. High optical efficiency isachieved over traditional abridged spectrometer designs because the outof band light incident upon a filter is not discarded but returned tothe optical system.

In accordance with such embodiments, each interference filter ispositioned above an electro-optical sensor. In certain preferredembodiments, the sensors are light to frequency converter sensors, suchas those manufactured by Texas Advanced Optical Systems (formerly TexasInstruments). Without being bound by theory, such sensing elements willnow be further described. The light to frequency converter sensorsgenerally are an array of photo diodes 1.25 mm square. There are 100 orother number of photo diodes in each array. Thus 100 (or other number)photo diodes serve as sensors for each interference filter providinghigh sensitivity and low electrical noise. Such light to frequencyconverters have a PWM (pulse width modulation) TTL compatible digitalsignal output. They produce a PWM signal whose frequency is directlyproportional to the intensity of the input light. Since the lightincident upon each light to frequency converter is notch filtered by itscorresponding interference filter, its output represents the integralintensity of a portion of the optical spectrum. The combined output ofall sensors is an abridged optical spectrum.

The RISC processor (or other processing or logic element, etc.) servesseveral functions. It provides a communication I-O bus (982 in FIG. 87)to external devices utilizing the miniature spectrometer. Thecommunication preferably is, for example, a 16 bit parallelcommunication port. The processor also measures the frequency of the PWMoutput of each sensor and calculates and presents to the communicationbus the calculated intensity of each sensor. The communication buspreferably is bi-directional. The bus and communication interfacepreferably is capable of receiving commands from an external device andis capable of responding to the commands and outputting spectralintensity and other data to the bus.

The preferred light to frequency converters produce a PWM output signalwith a frequency that is proportional to the incident light intensity.They are sensitive over the range 350 nm to 1200 nm. Certain of thesensors such as the TSL230 have programming logic inputs that allowsetting the sensitivity and scaling of the device. Others such as theTSL235 have no scaling and require only three pins: ground, power andoutput. Scaling is not required, the sensors shall operate at maximumsensitivity. The data sheets for such devices are hereby incorporated byreference.

The optical intensity is proportional to the frequency of the PWM outputof the sensor. It varies from DC to 300 kHz. At high light levels theintensity can be determined by measuring the frequency directly bycounting the number of transitions that occur over a sampling period. Atlow light levels the intensity is best determined by measuring theperiod of one or more oscillations. At all light levels the intensitycan be determined to any degree of precision by measuring both theperiod and frequency over a pre-determined sampling period.

FIG. 88 illustrates an exemplary high intensity measurement and a lowintensity measurement. The system samples the output of the sensor for apredetermined period of time and records both the number of outputtransitions of the sensor (counts both high to low and low to hightransitions) and measures the period by recording the number of systemclock transitions for each sensor output transition. The sampling periodis variable and is setup during initialization from the communicationbus. Note that certain sensors may be sampled at different rates; forexample, a broadband “value” or other sensor may be sampled at a higherrate due to higher optical throughput or the like, while other, such assensors under notch filters, may be sampled at a second lower rate(e.g., it is preferable to allow different sampling rates to providehigh grayscale precision under certain conditions). For 200samples/second the sampling period is 5 ms. For 1000 samples/second thesampling period is 1 ms and so on. The frequency of the clock (or of thesystem timing) determines the grayscale precision of the spectrometer.It should be noted that the timing clock is not the frequency of a clockoscillator input but is the frequency of a system timing loop. For aRISC processor, for example, it is the frequency of inputting allchannels of data, analyzing the data to determine if a transitionoccurred, saving the results and calculating the intensity. For thisexample, typical system timing loops are on the order of 1 to 10 MHz.${Precision} = \frac{f_{c}}{f_{s}}$where:

-   -   ƒ_(c)=Clock frequency    -   ƒ_(x)=Sampling frequency        Thus, for example, if the clock is 1 MHz and the sampling        frequency is 1000/sec the grayscale range is (1 MHz)/(1000 Hz)        or 1,000 or aprecision of 0.1%.

Referring again to FIG. 88, when the intensity is high, there are 6transitions in the output of the sensor during the sampling interval and27 clock states occurred at the last transition during the samplinginterval. Thus the intensity is: ${Intensity} = {\frac{6}{18} = 0.33}$The intensity in the low intensity measurement is:${Intensity} = {\frac{1}{17} = 0.058}$

Again without being bound by theory, consider the precision of themeasurement. In both cases the precision is determined by the timingclock. In order to make a measurement at least two transitions mustoccur. Assuming this to be the case, the period measurement is minimally½ the sampling clock. Thus the precision of the measurement generally isalways at minimum ½ the sampling clock.

In order to measure minimal light intensities input to the spectrometerthe output of the light to frequency converter sensors must minimallyrun at the system sampling frequency. Thus, if 200 samples/sec arerequired all sensors must provide an output that is >100 Hz (½ of acycle is minimally required). This is problematic when measuring colorreflectance (coefficient of reflectivity) because there are may besituations where a dark level or black level measurement is required andindependent of the amount of light present when white materials aremeasured dark materials will have intensities that are always too low.

To guarantee that the output of the sensors oscillate at a minimumfrequency, in certain preferred embodiments they are biased with light.The light may be broad band, out of band or monochromatic. In suchembodiments, it is desired that the light source has an intensity thatis stable. Tungsten filament lamps have been determined to be one typeof light source that may be suitable providing light bias to thesensors. LEDs may be used, but tend to be marginal because it in generalis difficult to control the luminous intensity to the degree required.Cold cathode lamps may also be suitable for light biasing. It does notmatter if the light bias wavelength (color) is in or out of band as longas it is within the range of the optical sensors.

The intensity measured with light biasing is thus:I _(t) =I _(b) +I _(i)where:

-   -   I_(t)=Total measured intensity    -   I_(b)=Bias light intensity    -   I_(i)=Input light intensity        In such embodiments, the spectrometer generally must be        normalized. In certain cases it may be desirable to linearize        the spectrometer as well, although linearization would be a one        time setup while normalization would be performed regularly. The        normalization process is a two step process. Firstly the input        light source is removed (either with an aperture or by turning        it off) and the bias intensity (I_(b)) is measured. Secondly a        known light input is applied and the intensity is measured a        second time (in color reflectance utilization the spectrometer        system preferably may first measure a black material such as a        black absorption cavity and makes a second measurement on a        material with a known reflectance spectrum; the intensity and        thus the gain of each sensor can be calculated). The normalized        intensity of a sensor is thus        I=G(I _(t) −I _(b))        where G=Gain of the sensor (unique for each sensor).

Generally, light biasing causes the system to loose resolution. If thelight bias is much greater than the light input, then one is subtractingtwo large numbers to create a small number (very undesirable). However,if the light bias is on the order of the “white” level or maximumintensity of the system the resolution is reduced by a factor of 2. Onthe other hand if the bias level is 10% or less of the “white” levelintensity the resolution is largely unaffected. The resultant resolutionafter subtracting the light bias is:$R = {R_{0}\frac{I_{w}}{I_{w} + I_{b}}}$where R₀=System total resolution.

Also generally, light biasing tends to introduce the possibility ofsystem noise. It is desirable that the light bias source be as stable aspossible. In certain applications such as color reflection probes havinga system lamp, light biasing can be readily achieved by providing itfrom the system lamp. In other applications a separate lamp may beprovided. Light biasing may be achieved by inputting a small amount of“white” light into the spectrometer input port (should be “white”, asmonochromatic will not pass through all filters in the spectrometer).Another method is to provide either white light or monochromatic lightdirectly to the light sensors such as via bias manifold/spacer 988 underthe optical manifold as illustrated in FIGS. 89A and 89B, which receivesthe white, monochromatic or other light at an input 988A and conductsbias light to optical sensors 979 independent of the filters, theoutputs of which may be processed by RISC or other processing element981 (other elements illustrated in the figures, such as optical manifold976, filters 977 also have been described elsewhere herein; bias sensormask 977X should be noted, which can serve to block light from manifold976 from entering a sensor that receives only the bias light, and whichmay thus serve to monitor, track and compensate for changes in the biaslight, etc.). A certain amount of bias light may penetrate into themanifold; once it is established, however, it generally should be stablefor all sensors, and can be calibrated/normalized out. (It generallywill make no difference if the bias reached the sensors from themanifold or from the spacer). It is desirable that light bias be equalfor all sensors. Thus, the bias manifold illustrated in FIGS. 89A and89B generally should be either constructed with a non-uniform thicknessor with a material having a translucence gradient to insure that allsensors are evenly illuminated.

In alternative embodiments, a translucent substrate is utilized formounting the RISC and sensors, such as an aluminum ceramic garnet. Sucha substrate generally will have low electrical conductivity, low thermalconductivity, low coefficient of thermal expansion and besemi-translucent.

As indicated earlier, one or more sensors preferably is utilized tomonitor only light bias and is masked from the optical manifold. Thispermits tracking and compensating for bias fluctuations. Although thebias level for each sensor will vary from one sensor to another, anylong or short term drift in general cause the same proportional changefor all sensors.

If

-   -   I_(bni)=Bias intensity at normalization for sensor i.    -   I_(bn0)=Bias intensity at normalization of bias sensor.    -   I_(b0)=Bias intensity of bias sensor measured after        normalization.        Then the intensity of any sensor i adjusted for bias drift is:        $I_{i} = {G\left( {I_{t} - {I_{bni} \cdot \frac{I_{b0}}{I_{bn0}}}} \right)}$

The preferred RISC processor (or gate array, DSP, PLA, ASIC or otherprocessing or logic element(s); where RISC processor is mentioned, it isunderstood that such other processing elements also may be utilized)inputs the outputs of the sensors and calculates the intensity of eachsensor and provides the data to the I-O bus. Each sensor is a bit inputto the RISC processor via a suitable port. The RISC processor calculatesthe intensity of the sensors via a software timing loop, exemplarypreferred embodiments of which will be described in connection withFIGS. 90A-90E (the present invention is not limited to such timingloops, etc., but such timing loops will be understood to provide aspecific example utilizable in certain preferred embodiments, etc.).Such a loop preferably is executed repetitively during the measurementprocess. Essentially the software loop counts the number of transitionsthat occur for each sensor during the sampling interval and also recordsthe number of timing transitions (loop cycles) that occur between thefirst and last transition (see, e.g., FIG. 88). Thus, in a system with30 sensors the RISC processor should have available a 30 bit data bus,30 sets of registers or other storage locations that can record thenumber of transitions and the period of each input and have time toperform 30 sets of floating point math.

A single (or multiple) SH2 (SuperH Microprocessor made by Hitachi, Ltd.,as an example) should be able to easily operate with 8 sensors andobtain gray scale resolutions of 2¹² at 200 samples per second. If asingle SH2 or SH3 microprocessor can operate with 30 or more sensors (toachieve 10 nm spectral resolution) in the particular, then two (or more)processors may be utilized; one microprocessor may be used to gather thedata in a timing loop (number of transitions and period), and a secondmicroprocessor may perform the floating point division and present thedata to the bus and handles the bus hand-shaking and timing, etc.Alternately a RISC processor and one or more gate arrays may beutilized. Such alternatives for processing the signals (input and outputand from the optical sensors, etc.) are within the scope of the presentinvention.

Note that the time required to execute the “Principle Timing Loop”illustrated in FIG. 90B determines the sampling rate and resolution ofthe system.

If

-   -   τ=Principle Timing Loop Period    -   N=Number of sensors    -   R=Desired resolution of the measurement.    -   T=Software overhead time (intensity calculation etc.)        The spectrometer sampling rate is:        $r = \frac{1}{\left( {R \cdot N \cdot \tau} \right) + T}$        At an exemplary sampling rate of 200 Hz and a minimal software        overhead time of T=0 (may only be possible with two or more        processors), the software timing loop period is:        $\tau = \frac{1}{\left( {200\quad{Hz}} \right) \cdot R \cdot N}$        and the loop rate is: (1/τ) or:

Loop Rate=(200 Hz)R·N

Loop Rate (Millions/sec) 2¹² 2¹⁴ 2¹⁶ Sensors (N) Resolution (R) (4096)(16384) (65536) 40 32.8 131.1 524.3 30 26.6 106.4 424.6 15 13.3  53.2212.8  8  6.55  26.2 104.8For 40 sensors (30 for the spectrometer, 10 extra), resolutions inexcess of 2¹² and a sampling gate of 200/sec may be difficult to achievewith a single RISC processor. A combination of RISC and gate array (ormultiple RISC or other processors, etc.) may be utilized in suchembodiments.

In certain preferred embodiments, a RISC processor and/or one or moregate arrays may be utilized. In one such exemplary embodiment, 32sensors are included, and four Altera 10K10 fate array a (one per 8sensors) each operating at only 20 MHz to perform the timing and uses anIntel Pentium (in a PC) to execute the division and display the results.Four gate arrays may be used such as for purposes of each of packaging,but such embodiments could be readily implemented on one 10K40 and mostlikely will operated on a 10K30.

The use of such gate arrays may measure the frequency and period of eachsensor in parallel. The frequency may be measured by counting the numberof transitions of a sensor in the sampling interval. The period ismeasured by counting the number of system clock transitions during thesame interval. Both registers may be 16 bits. At the end of the samplinginterval the registers may be stored in dual port RAM and a ready bitset. The gate array may then clear the frequency and period registersand continue the process for another sampling interval. When completedthe data may again stored in dual port RAM.

The processor interfaces with both the communications bus and the gatearray. It sets the gate array sampling interval (and thus the resolutionand sampling rate). It reads the data in the dual port RAM, (e.g., two16 bit words per sensor) and executes the division and presents the datato the communication bus. Clock timing utilizing a gate array (or otherparallel processor) may be considerably less than utilizing a RISC orserial processor and the clock rate may not be affected by the number ofsensors, although the size of the gate array may be. In addition tocells required for dual port RAM, system timing and glue logic, 32D-flip flops may be utilized per sensor to implement the timingmeasurement.

The timing for a gate array or parallel processors is:

Timing Clock=S·R

Timing Clock (MHz) Sampling Rate 2¹² 2¹⁴ 2¹⁶ (Hz) Resolution (R) (4096)(16384) (65536) 100 0.41 1.6  6.6 200 0.82 3.3 13.1 500 2.05 8.2 32.81000  4.1  16.4  65.5

As described in greater detail elsewhere herein, an optical diffuserpreferably is utilized to serve to eliminate distribution patterns inthe input light source. Distribution patterns such as radial or axialpatterns cause light to be unevenly distributed within the opticalmanifold. If the manifold were 100% efficient—no absorption on the wallsor within the interference filters distribution patterns would presentno linearity difficulties. However, since the system is not 100%efficient, radial and axial distribution patterns in the light input mayresult in non-even and non-regular distribution of light to the opticalfilters and sensors. Thus, if the system is calibrated with an evendistribution pattern and normalized with another and makes measurementswith yet a third, the gain settings of each sensor likely will not beconstant throughout the entire process. Thus the spectrums may appeardistorted or non-linear in certain situations.

In preferred embodiments, an optical diffuser having low loss isutilized. One approach utilized in certain embodiments is a non-coherentlight guide (also described in greater detail elsewhere herein).Coherent light guides are common in the industry and have their largestutilization in flexible endoscopes. Both flexible and ridge versions arecommercially available. The resolution of the light guide depends uponthe number of fibers in the guide. A non-coherent light guide serves theopposite purpose of a coherent light guide. A non-coherent light guidepurposely scrambles light while a coherent light guide strives tomaintain a one to one geometric mapping from one end to another(exemplary non-coherent light guide, such as having 100 or more fibers,are described in greater detail elsewhere herein, see, e.g., FIGS. 72and 73A and 73B). The efficiency of a non-coherent light guide is due tototal internal reflection within the fibers. Losses occur for light raysout of the acceptance cone of the fiber optic. Losses also occur due tothe ratio of the cladding area to total area. If fibers with largenumerical aperture are utilized (NA of 0.6 or 0.75) the losses due torays being outside the acceptance cone are negligible for mostapplications. If the fibers are fused at each end the fibers becomehexagonal rather than circular, further reducing losses due to voids ineach end.

Other options for diffusers are integrating spheres, holographicdiffusers and diffusion by scattering (e.g., cloudy quartz or othermaterial). Integrating spheres tend to be large. Holographic diffuserstend to be expensive and scattering diffusers tend to have lowefficiency (high absorption loss). In most cases to achieve diffusion to99% or higher, the losses in conventional diffusers are typically muchlarger than that that can be achieved by a non-coherent light guide.Thus, in certain preferred embodiments in which the spectrometerapplication is one in which a fiber optic sensor serves as the input tothe spectrometer a non-coherent light guide is utilized (such anon-coherent light for a fiber optic input spectrometer may be used withalternative spectrometer designs, including others described elsewhereherein and conventional spectrometers, etc.). The fiber optic sensorinput may be the non-coherent light guide. When used in such a system,it is very convenient for the probe sensor to be one end of thenon-coherent light guide and the other end the input to thespectrometer. It may prove desirable for the diffuser to be an accessoryto the spectrometer for custom or OEM applications, although ifpractical it should be an integral part of the system.

As described in greater detail elsewhere herein, blocking filters arepreferably used in certain embodiments. Interference filters haveprimary and secondary transmission characteristics. When designed as anotch transmission filter (transmits a narrow wavelength band) it oftendoes so at different wavelength regions. Hence a filter constructed totransmit blue light at 430 to 440 nm will also transmit light at near IRand IR wavelengths as well. The out of band secondary transmissions arebest reduced by absorption blocking filters. One placed at the entranceport limits the light in the optical manifold to the visible band andpermits the interference filters to be as thin as possible.

Various optical manifolds used in certain preferred embodiments havepreviously been described. Such an optical manifold serves to distributeand present the input light to the filters. The manifold is an opticalcavity where light enters though an entrance port and reflectsinternally with low loss until it eventually strikes a filter. If thelight is within the transmission band of the filter it is transmittedthrough the filter and exists the manifold and subsequently detected byan optical sensor. If it is out of band, then it is reflected by thefilter and is returned to the cavity and continues to reflect from thewalls and other filters until it eventually is absorbed or istransmitted through a filter. A certain percentage of light will beabsorbed in both the walls of the cavity, the filters and exit backthrough the entrance port. It is a design objective to minimize allthree types of losses. It is a further design objective to obtain smallsize.The overall system optical efficiency is:$E = {{1 - \frac{I_{w} + I_{f}}{I_{0}}} = \frac{I_{t}}{I_{0}}}$where:

-   -   I₀=Input light Intensity.    -   I_(w)=Intensity absorbed in walls.    -   I_(f)=Intensity absorbed in filters.    -   I_(t)=Intensity passing through filters and incident upon        sensors.        The intensity absorbed by the walls for each reflection is:        $I_{w} = {\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{n}\quad{A_{w}I_{i}}}$        where:    -   A_(w)=Coefficient of absorption of the walls.    -   n=Number of reflections on the walls. $\begin{matrix}        {I_{i} = {{Intensity}\quad{of}\quad{reflection}\quad{i.}}} \\        {= {\left( {{Coefficient}\quad{Reflection}} \right)*\left( {{Previous}\quad{intensity}} \right)}} \\        {= {\left( {1 - A_{w}} \right)I_{i - 1}}}        \end{matrix}$        Thus:        I _(w) ≈n·A _(w) ·I ₀(if A_(w) is small).        where    -   I₀=Input light intensity.        For a polished quartz or other optical cavity mirrored on the        exterior or the interior (such as a multipart manifold, which        has inner surfaces mirrored prior to assembly, etc.), the        coefficient of absorption may be very low, 0.1% or less. Thus        the walls may sustain 50 or more reflections to reduce the        system efficiency by only 5%. The filters may suffer from much        greater absorption loss, sometimes as high as 25%. In preferred        embodiments, filters are deposited and formed in a manner to        reduce such losses. It is desirable for the system efficiency to        be as high as possible.

Various manifold designs are within the scope of the present invention.The following optical manifold designs are presented for consideration.On example was described in connection with FIGS. 71, 74A and 74B, and75. Such a manifold may consist, for example, of a block of quartz thatis polished and mirrored on all sides. One end serves as the input port.A side serves as exit ports that are directly above the optical sensorsand are bonded to the sensors with an absorption spacer. The entranceport and the exit ports may be windows in the mirrored outer surface.The exit ports preferably have interference filters deposited over them.The filters are deposited in layers and many of the layers are common tomultiple exit ports rendering the cost of the deposition of the filtersmuch less expensive than if they were deposited individually. Theplacement of the filters are determined to minimize the number ofdeposition steps and also to reduce the number of reflections to theshort wavelength sensors (blue filters and sensors) hence increasingtheir proportionate intensity.

Such a manifold also may desirably utilize a spacer as illustrated inFIGS. 71 and 75. One purpose of the spacer is to reduce the angle oflight rays that can be transmitted through the interference filters andbe subsequently detected by the sensors. This is desirable because theoptical transmission properties of interference filters are angulardependent. In general when the angle of incidence is 15% or less thetransmission wavelength band pass is unaffected by angle. However, asthe angle increases the transmission band pass is both broadened andshifted to longer wavelengths. Hence, it is not possible to permit thefilters and sensors to support any angle of incidence but the anglesshould be limited to a certain range. As illustrated in FIG. 75, such aspacer serves to limit the range of angles that can pass through thefilters and also be detected by the sensors.

An alternative manifold was discussed in connection with FIGS. 76A and76B (this was shown as having a 2×8 array of exit ports, but this andother manifolds have utilized other sized arrays, such as 4×8 or n×malso may be utilized, etc.). Such an optical manifold may be molded withconvex converging lenses on the exit ports. The manifold preferably ismirrored on all exterior (or interior) surfaces except for the entranceport and the converging lenses. The purpose of the lenses is tocollimate the light that strikes a lens and to provide a nearlycollimated beam to the interference filters. The filters preferably maybe deposited directly on the lenses as discussed in connection with FIG.77, and the manifold preferably is optically bonded to the sensors. Insuch embodiments, it is desirable to deposit the filters in a wedgemanner over the face of the lenses, e.g. the optical transmissionproperties of the filters vary as a function of radial angle.

Another alternative manifold has been described in connection with FIG.78, which utilizes a cavity with concave Lenses and two opticalmaterials. Such an optical manifold may be constructed with concaverecesses on the exit ports. The recesses are filled with an opticalgrade material that has a higher index of refraction than the manifoldcavity. Thus the interface from lower to higher index of refractionserves to collimate light rays striking the exit port. The manifold ismirrored on its exterior (or interior) surfaces to support a high degreeof internal reflection and has both entrance and exit windows. Theinterference filters may be deposited over the exit ports as illustratedand previously described. Thus, light striking the interference filterswill be nearly collimated or collimated to within, for example, 15%facilitating good spectral filter response.

Another alternative manifold has been described in connection with FIG.79, which utilizes a two-part cavity with lenses and an entrance baffle(such features of the manifolds may be combined with alternativeembodiments, etc.). Such a manifold desirably utilizes a hollow cavityconstructed of two parts. One is a simple hollow cavity that is platedon the inside and has an entrance port and an open side. The otherconsists of a lens plate with aspherical lenses molded on one side andinterference filters plated on the other. The lens plate may be attachedto the top plate with a suitable adhesive. Such a manifold may beoptically bonded to the optical sensors and can be in very closeproximity to the sensors. It may be the most efficient of all fourdesigns and potentially the simplest to construct. The upper portionalso contains a baffle that prevents light from escaping back throughthe entrance port. The upper portion of the cavity may have additionalbaffles and a diffusing surface rather than a mirrored surface tofacilitate maximal light diffusion and system optical linearity.

Many applications of such a miniature spectrometer will require wideband or non-filtered sensors in addition to filtered or spectrometersensors (such as for value measurement, perimeter sensors for height andangle, gloss, translucency or for other purposes as described elsewhereherein). While it is possible to fabricate two sets of sensors, one withfilters (spectrometer) and another without, it perhaps may be more costeffective in such systems to provide additional sensors for thenon-filtered sensors and fabricate them on the same substrate.Alternatively, if such an embodiment does not include non-filteredsensors, it preferably should include inputs allowing sensors to becascaded into the system.

An exemplary overall embodiment employing such sensors is illustrated inFIG. 91. As illustrated, the spectrometer components areformed/positioned on a preferably unitary substrate 991, such as ahybrid IC type substrate, PC care type packaging or the like. Preferablyformed/positioned on the same substrate are processing elements 981A and981B (in other embodiments, one or multiple gate arrays, RISC processorsor other elements are utilized, such as described elsewhere herein).Optical components such as diffuser 974, blocking filter 975 and optical976 may be implemented and formed/positioned on the common unitarysubstrate. Sensors may include sensor array 990B including filteredsensors for purposes of implementing the spectrometer, and sensor array990A including unfiltered sensors for other purposes (as describedelsewhere herein). Such a sensor array 990A may include additionaloptical manifold 976W, which may be constructed similarly to manifold976, such that light may be desirably delivered to optical sensors orarray 990A. Such sensors may be light to frequency converters, and maybe used to spectrally analyze the light as well as for the otherpurposes described in greater detail elsewhere herein. As illustrated,the constituent components may be enclosed in enclosure 993, which maybe a resin or potting compound or other material. The final assembly mayinclude one or multiple input ports for light input (such as for the twosensor arrays), and terminals 992 for input and output of signals, powerand ground, etc., and for assembly in or on a PCB for inclusion into asystem incorporating the spectrometer (exemplary system applications,such as for teeth or other dental objections, paint, etc. are describedelsewhere herein).

As described in part elsewhere herein, in accordance with embodiments ofthe present invention, filters and sensors are utilized together tospectrally analyze light. Additional aspects relating to the manufactureof such components as part of a spectrometer or spectrometer-basedsystem in accordance with the present invention will now be described.

FIG. 92 illustrates a general manufacturing flow chart for purposes ofdescribing various embodiments in accordance with the present invention.At step 995A, the optical manifold is formed. Such a manifold may beformed of quarts, polymeric optical materials or other suitablematerials, such as are described elsewhere herein. At step 995B, theoptical sensors are formed. Such optical sensors may consist of photodiodes, arrays of photo diodes, CCD-sensors of a linear or matrix form,light to frequency converters or other sensors as described elsewhereherein. In one particular aspect of the present invention, such sensorsare formed on semiconductor substrate in an array.

While much of the fabrication technology for such sensors is known andconventional, in one particular aspect of the present invention, priorto dicing (e.g., cutting, such as by diamond saw or laser machining) butafter formation of the semiconductor-based detector electronics, asuitable thin optical passivation layer is applied, such as chemicalvapor deposition (CVD), which may doped or undoped as appropriate forthe desired optical and mechanical/passivation properties. Thepassivation layer is such that filters, such as interference filters asdescribed elsewhere herein, are deposited directly on the wafer over oneor a plurality of arrays of sensors, such as at step 995C. The sensorsmay be discrete steps covering the optical band of interest, or they mayconsist of a wedge filter, with substantially continuing spectralcharacteristics (the properties of such a wedge or linear variablefilter are known in the art). As opposed to being deposited on anoptical substrate, however, in accordance with the present inventionsuch filter(s) may be deposited directly on the optical sensors, whichserves to improve overall efficiency. Thus, in accordance with certainpreferred embodiments of the present invention, arrays of sensors may beformed in a regular pattern, such as on a semiconductor wafer, with anoptical passivation layer applied, and then filters deposited over thearrays. Masking steps (conventional photolithography, etc.) may beutilized to form the filters only the areas of interest, or subsequentmasking steps may be utilized to remove the deposited filter materialfrom undesired areas.

Also in accordance with the present invention, the filters correspondingto the shorter wavelengths, or bluer portions of the spectrum, may beformed over sensors that have a greater number of sensors, in parallel,as compared to the longer wavelength, or redder portions of thespectrum. Those, a greater number of sensing elements are provided insuch embodiments for the portions of the spectrum where the system hasless sensitivity, thereby producing a spectrometer andspectrometer-based system that is more balanced in its spectralsensitivity. Thus, in accordance with the present invention, sensorsand/or optical ports in a manifold may have sizes varied in a manner tohelp compensate for sensitivity variations in the optical system.

Thereafter, at step 995D, the sensors may be diced/cut in order tofinally passivated and/or packaged. It also should be noted that, inalternative embodiments, the filters are formed on the sensors afterdicing/cutting from the wafer, but prior to final passivation/packaging.In general, however, embodiments in which the filters formed at thewafer level will provide higher throughput efficiencies, but at somecost of process complexity.

In still other embodiments, such as described elsewhere herein, thefilters are deposited in a similar manner but, instead of being formedon the sensors, are formed on the manifolds (or a component of theoptical manifold) that is produced at step 995A. Thus, in the generalflow of FIG. 92, the illustrated sequence of steps is not intended to beconstrued as defining a particular order of steps. In such embodiments,the filters may be deposited on the manifold or a component of themanifold (multi-part manifolds are described in greater detail elsewhereherein), and the sensor formation and dicing/cutting/packaging may bebefore, after or in parallel with the manifold formation and filterdeposition, etc.

At step 995E, a final spectrometer assembly and preferably testoperation is performed. At this time, the sensor/filter subassembly isbonded to the optical manifold, or the manifold/filter assembly isbonded to the sensors/sensor subassembly (depending upon theembodiment). This step may include other steps, such optical bonding ofa light diffuser, blocking filter and/or other components or manifolds(see the various embodiments illustrated in the figures and describedelsewhere herein), and may also include a final molding or packagingstep, such as described in connection with FIG. 91. The spectrometerportion may then be tested as a part of step 995, prior to assembly in asystem product or sale as a component part.

At step 995F, such a “single chip” or integrated miniature spectrometer(such as illustrated in the drawings and described above), may beassembled as part of a system product. Exemplary spectrophotometer typeproducts are described in greater detail elsewhere herein, which may beapplied to many uses, many of which are described elsewhere herein.

In accordance with the present invention, highly miniaturized, low costspectrometer and spectrometer-based products may be produced.

It should be understood that, for purposes of description andunderstanding of the principles underlying the inventions disclosedherein, various theoretical principles, formulas and the like wereprovided, although such description is without being bound by anyparticular theory.

Based on the foregoing description, it will be appreciated thatspectrometers, and spectrophotometers including a controlled lightsource as described previously, may be implemented in a variety of formfactors, sizes and spectral resolution characteristics (e.g., number andbandwidth of filters over a desired range or ranges). Such spectrometersand spectrophotometers desirably may be produced in sizes and atmanufacturing costs that open up new and/or improved applications ofsuch devices. Without limiting the generality of such possibleapplications, additional particular applications of such spectrometersand spectrophotometers will now be described.

FIG. 93 illustrates system 93, which preferably is a printing, inking,painting or similar system, exemplary systems being a laser printer, inkjet printer, printing—type press or other printing or painting systemthat controllably applies ink, paint or other pigment or material (forease of description, herein referred to as ink) to substrate 1004(examples being paper, fabric, plastic, metal or other material on whichthe ink is to be controllably applied, etc.). In the illustrated system,head 1003 controllably applies the ink through one or (preferably) aplurality of orifices (e.g., ink jets or nozzles) in what may beconsidered a raster or other scan pattern by horizontally traversingcarriage (or other movable implement) 1002 (in other embodiments aplurality of heads and/or jets or nozzles are provided). Carriage 1002moves in the vertical direction with respect to substrate 1004 (thearrows diagrammatically indicate the horizontal and vertical motions ofhead 1003 and carriage 1002). It is to be understood, however, that thesubstrate may be moved with respect to carriage 1002 to accomplish therelative vertical motion, and in a preferred embodiment head 1003accomplishes a first, horizontal motion with respect to substrate 1004by controllable movement along carriage 1002, which a second, verticalmotion with respect to substrate 1004 is accomplished by controllablemovement of substrate 1004 with respect to carriage 1002. Such movementof a printing type head and/or substrate may be achieved as in aconventional laser, ink jet or other printer or printing-type press orsimilar system. What is important is that head 1003 controllablytraverse a desired area within substrate 1004 (which may be the entiretyof substrate 1004 or some lesser area, such as if margins are provided)so that the ink may be controllably applied to the desired area, such asunder software control of computer 1000A (e.g., as in a personal orother computer printing a desired image on a color printer or the like).Head 1003 desirably may consist of or include a removable/replaceableink cartridge (or cartridges) so that users or operators may readilyreplace the ink containing portion of head 1003, in embodiments wherehead 1003 includes one or more ink storage portions.

In accordance with the present invention, however, associated with one(or a plurality of heads 1003) is spectrometer 1001, which follows themotion of head 1003 with respect to substrate 1004 in order to producespectral data (e.g., a spectral analysis) of the ink(s) as applied byhead 1003 to substrate 1004. In a preferred embodiment, as head 1003applies ink(s) to substrate 1004, the motion along carriage 1002 movesthe area where the ink(s) have been applied to a position correspondingto where spectrometer 1001 may determine the spectral/opticalcharacteristics of the ink(s) on substrate 1004. In accordance with suchembodiments, system 1000 includes CPU 1005, which desirably controls themovement of head 1003 and spectrometer 1001 along carriage 1002, and themovement of carriage 1002 with respect to substrate 1004 (or vice versa,etc.), and which controls the discharges of the ink(s) from theorifice(s) on head 1003 (bus 1006 illustrates diagrammatically acommunication path between CPU 1005 and other constituent elements ofsystem 1000, such as those illustrated and others such as user inputkeys, a display, a parallel, serial or Ethernet/packet communicationport, etc.). CPU 1005 also desirably receives spectra/opticalcharacteristics data from spectrometer 1001 such that CPU 1005 may,under software control, controllably adjust the discharge of the ink(s)on substrate 1004 so that the ink(s) as applied to the particularsubstrate 1004 are of a desired spectral characteristic(s). For example,even though substrate 1004 may vary, the discharge of the ink(s) may becontrolled (such as by adjusting the number, size or pattern of ink dotsin a unit printing cell or simply the amount of ink per unit area ofsubstrate traversed) so that the end product of ink(s) on substrate havea desired spectral characteristic. Spectrometer 1001 may thus beimplemented as part of a feedback loop that controls the discharge ofthe ink(s) from head 1003.

It should also be noted that spectrometer 1001 may be implemented with alight source (or sources) such as described elsewhere herein (and thusmay be a spectrophotometer on carriage 1002), or alternatively acontrolled light source may be provided within system 1000 (on or off ofcarriage 1002) in order to illuminate the area to bespectrally/optically analyzed by spectrometer 1001. Still alternatively,spectrometer 1001 maybe implemented in system 1000 such that relativevertical motion is achieved between spectrometer 1001 and substrate1004, with spectrometer 1001 determining the height and/or angle withrespect to substrate 1004 to ensure that measurements are taken at apredetermined height and/or angle (in many embodiments, the substratemay be of controlled shape, such as flat, so that the height and anglemay be assumed, but in other embodiments the substrate could be of ashape and/or position that varies, and spectrometer 1001 thus determinesthe height and/or angle of spectrometer 1001 and/or head 1003 withrespect to the substrate; spectrometer 1001 thus may serve to ensurethat head 1003 discharges the ink(s) from a known distance or positionrelative to substrate 1003.

In other embodiments of system 1000, spectrometer(s) 1001 (and orspectrophotometers) are positioned along the outer edge of substrate1004 and continually monitor a test strip (which consists of color bandsand or a gray scale bands), which is applied in the printing process tothe outer edge of substrate 1004.

In other embodiments, system 1000 operates in a mode in whichspectrometer 1001 initially measures substrate 1004, and prior todischarging the ink(s) controllably adjusts the ink dischargecharacteristics based on the spectral/optical characteristics ofsubstrate 1004. In this manner, the end result of ink(s) on substratemay more desirably match the desired spectral/optical characteristics bymaking adjustments based on the spectral/optical characteristics of thesubstrate. This may be combined with real time, feedback-type control(as previously described) to further ensure that desiredspectral/optical outputs are achieved. This may be implemented bycontrolling access to an ink control matrix, lookup table, algorithmicor mathematical computation or other manner appropriate for theparticular application. What is important is that spectrometer 1001provide spectral/optical data so that CPU 1005 may control the dischargeof the ink(s) in a manner at least in part determined by thespectral/optical characteristics of substrate 1004.

In yet other embodiments, CPU 1005 stores data from which theperformance and/or life expectancy of head 1003 may be controlled and/orpredicted. In one embodiment, based on output from spectrometer 1001,CPU 1005 first attempts to adjust the discharge of the ink(s) in adesired manner, but if desired spectral/optical characteristics are notbeing achieved, then controls an alarm, display of error message, etc.,while desirably stopping the ink discharge so that an operator mayperform maintenance on system 1000 (e.g., replace head 1003 or someportion thereof, such as a removable ink cartridge(s), or otherwiseservice head 1003). In other embodiments, CPU 1005 may also monitor dataoutput from spectrometer 1001 (or monitor adjustments made to the inkdischarge based on such data output) and then predict the expectedremaining life (or time to failure, such as in terms of pages or otherunit) of head 1003. Preferably, on such data output, when the estimatedlife expectancy (or time to failure, etc.) is within a predeterminedrange or drops below a threshold, CPU controllably displays a suitablemessage on a display of system 1000 so that a user or operator may bealerted to prepare for maintenance or head replacement or service, etc.

In still other embodiments, CPU 1005 implements a life expectancy rangein a manner such that system 1000 is desirably stopped prior todischarging ink in an undesired manner (in some applications, it may bedesirable to stop discharging ink rather than risk destroying ordamaging or undesirably inking the substrate, or to stop the inkdischarge so that system 1000 may enter a head cleaning or otherservice/help mode in order to rectify the performance or other problem).In such embodiments, the system operates in such a mode as directed by auser or operator (such as by user control through software from computer1000A or by switch or key input), in a preferred embodiment each (or atleast certain) of the print jobs sent from computer 1000A includes dataindicating whether such a mode should be initiated by CPU 1005, and inyet other embodiments the print jobs (or at least certain of the printjobs) include commands to CPU 1005 and/or spectrometer 1001 so that CPU1005 and spectrometer 1001 and head 1003 controllably discharge theink(s) in a desired manner. This could include commands to ensure thatone or more predetermined areas of the image of the print job have adesired spectral characteristic (this could be by way of a multi-passapproach, in which ink is discharged, the area measured, and the processrepeated as desired to achieved the desired spectral characteristic, orby way of the print job indicating that a certain portion of thesubstrate may be used as an “experimental area” such that ink may bedischarged in the experimental and then measured until the appropriateink discharge parameters are determined for the particular head (and inits particular condition, such as age condition or length of use,particular head manufacturing batch, etc.), and then discharged in thedesired area of substrate 1004. In still other embodiments, the printjob or user/operator input may indicate that the print job is monochrome(e.g., black ink on which substrate) so that spectrometer 1001 may beshut off (to save the light source or power, etc.).

In still other embodiments, system 1000 may operate in a mode to displaythe status of spectrometer 1001 on a display of system 1001, or maycommunicate with computer 100A to provide such status information. Suchstatus information may include an indication that spectrometer isoperational, has been operating with a lamp for a measured number ofhours (CPU 1005 may thus track the number of hours and/or performance ofthe lamp within spectrometer 1001 or system 1000 in order to predict theneed for lamp replacement), or may indicate that the spectrometer is notoperational (e.g., lamp failure, could not execute a calibrationsequence, is operating out of range, etc.). In accordance with suchembodiments, spectrometer 1001, CPU 1005 and (preferably) computer 1000Aand other elements of system 1000 cooperatively operate so that theoperational mode and status of system 1000 including spectrometer 1001maybe controlled or determined, either on system 1000 or computer 1000Aor by a remote computer coupled to computer 1000A (such as a computercoupled to computer 1000A by way of a local area network or by a widearea network such as over the Internet so that a local or remoteadministrator, operator or user may locally or remotely monitor theoperation of system 1000). This will be understood, of course, toinclude coupling spectral/optical characteristics data from spectrometer1001 to a display on system 1000 or to computer 1000A or to anothercomputer such as for purposes of such local and/or remote monitoring.This is particularly important for embodiments where items may beproduced at remote locations (within a facility or over physicallyremote facilities) such as for mass printing or the like, while remotelymonitoring (such as from a central location) the spectral integrity ofthe output being produced at the various locations.

It should also be understood that system 1000 includes the ability toscan the sensing area of spectrometer 1001 over all or some desiredportion of substrate 1004, which may be accomplished prior to inkdischarge (and/or during the ink discharge process). For example,spectrometer 1001 may initially “survey” or map all or a desired portionof substrate 1004 for spectral uniformity or for defects. Spectrometer1001, in conjunction with CPU 1005, may then reject or accept theparticular substrate 1004, or it may produce a spectral map so thatduring the discharge of the ink(s) to produce the desired image thespectral data or map is accessed to determine if the ink discharge needsto be adjusted based on a detected spectral anomaly or characteristic atone or more points on substrate 1004. This could be because of undesirednon-uniformities in substrate 1004, but also could be due todesired/intentional non-uniformities within substrate 1004 (for example,substrate 1004 could be introduced into system 1000 with a predeterminedand desired pattern of spectral characteristics, a pattern or multiplepatterns which spectrometer 1001 and CPU 1005 could detect and record,so that ink discharge may be desirably controlled in a manner based on adetermination of the location and spectral characteristics of suchpatterns). One example of the foregoing is a system in which a logo orpredetermined emblem or system of desired spectral integrity is to beapplied to the substrate, but the precise location of the application isnot known to the system; spectrometer 1001 and CPU 1005 may spectrallyanalyze the substrate point by point, and, based on such spectralanalysis, determine the location for such application.

In still other embodiments, system 1000 operates in scan mode forsubstrates on which an image or set of color patterns is alreadyapplied. As exemplary embodiments, spectrometer 1001 scans the substratepoint by point and send the spectral analysis data to CPU 1005 (whichmay be coupled to computer 1000A or to another local or remote computer,as previously described). A map or color image of what was imprinted onthe substrate may then be produced and stored (and transmitted locallyor to a remote computer, etc.), and which desirably may be utilized toproduce one or a plurality of second articles based on such storedspectral analysis data (the system or a second system could then operatein print mode in order to produce the second object or objects based onthe stored spectral analysis data). Thus, spectrometer 1001, whileembedded in exemplary system 1000, may desirably operate in a mode tocollect input spectral data, and/or in a mode to control the output ofinks in a manner to produce inked substrates of desired spectralcharacteristics. In the mode of producing inked/imprinted substrates ofdesired spectral characteristics, it is understood that the substratecould be an image, an article for advertising, a controlled document orimplement such as passports, currency, stocks, tickets for sporting orother entertainment events, bonds, coupons, postage stamps and the like.As explained in greater detail elsewhere herein, such document/implementproduced may be conducted such that system 1000 is coupled to a central,likely remote, intelligence and data collection center, such thatarticles may be produced of known and/or desired spectral/opticalcharacteristics, with such spectral/optical characteristics recorded sothat at a subsequent time it may be determined if the article is genuineor counterfeit or undesirably altered or the like. It also should benoted that a predetermined portion (or portions) of substrate 1004 couldbe selectively imprinted/measured for purposes of detecting whether thearticle is genuine, and in some embodiments only a predetermined portionof the visible or (near) infrared spectrum is analyzed for suchpurposes. Thus, a physical area and/or spectral band could be measuredfor such purposes, where the human eye likely would not be able todetect or determine which area or band was under examination.

In some embodiments, system 1000 operates in a color mode (dischargingcolor ink(s), with spectrometer 1001 monitoring the spectral/opticalcharacteristics of the ink(s) on substrate 1004, etc.) or a black/whitemodel. In the black/white mode, system 1000 desirably operates in a modewhere CPU 1005 is informed by computer 1000A or by user input or filecommand that system 1000 is operating in the black/white mode, and CPU1005 directs that spectrometer 1001 either turn off (and save lamp life,power consumption, etc.), or that spectrometer 1001 operate in a monitormode to determine if the black ink is being discharged in the desiredmanner. In certain of such embodiments, spectrometer 1001 includes abroadband sensor (i.e., a sensor in which light is received through abroad bandpass or neutral density or no filter), as the measurement tobe made is primarily one of value (e.g., is the high value substrate orblack ink in the area being measured, etc.). With such a broadbandsensor, in certain of such embodiments spectrometer operates at a firstspeed for the broadband sensor (e.g., a high sampling rate such as 500,750, 1000, 1500 samples per second or about these numbers) as the lightintensity to the sensor would be expected to be either very high or verylow, and at a second speed for the color measuring sensors (e.g., arelatively lower sampling rate, such as 25, 50, 100, 200, or 500 samplesper second or about these numbers) as the light intensity to the colormeasuring sensors would be expected to be relatively lower. While theentire spectrometer may run at either the first or second speed,depending on the operating mode, it may be that the spectrometer runs ingeneral such that the broadband sensors produce data at the first rateand the color sensors produce data at the second rate, while in theblack/white mode the spectral sensors output data that is not monitoredby CPU 1005.

As illustrated in FIG. 93, system 1000 may include one or morecalibration standard 1001A. Upon start up, user command, receipt of aprint job, predetermined time intervals (or some logical combination ofthe above), spectrometer 1001 is controlled to move over or in proximityto calibration standard 1001A, and at which point spectrometer 1001collects data which is (preferably) stored by CPU 1005 and used as acalibration reference for calibrating/normalizing spectral/opticalcharacteristics data to be subsequently collected by spectrometer 1001(the use of a calibration standard or standards has been describedelsewhere herein). In preferred embodiments, CPU 1005 analyzescalibration data to make a determination or prediction of whether thecalibration standard may need to be serviced, such as by detecting anaberration in the calibration data, such as a low value, which mayindicate the presence of dirt or other obstruction. In yet otherembodiments, calibration standard 1001 is of sufficient size so that aplurality of calibration measurements may be made of calibrationstandard 1001, preferably at different physical locations on calibrationstandard 1001, with CPU 1005 analyzing the spectral data collected fromthe plurality of measurements (e.g., taking an average, looking forinconsistencies or large variations that may indicate a possible needfor service, cleaning, etc., of calibration standard 1001A, which may beconveyed on a display or to computer 1000A such as previouslydescribed). In preferred embodiments, system 1000 desirably operates ina mode to periodically calibrate spectrometer 1001, which system 1000also preferably including the capability to analyze calibration data todetect or predict the need for servicing or cleaning of calibrationstandard 1001A (system 1000 could optionally operate in a mode where anoperator is periodically directed or instructed to inspect, service,clean, etc., calibration standard 1001A. In certain embodiments,calibration standard 1001A is physically located in closed orsemi-closed enclosure, where the enclosure is entirely or substantiallyseparated from the area or areas in which (for example) substrates movethrough system 1000, in order to minimize dust collection on calibrationstandard 1001A. In calibration mode, spectrometer 1001 desirably movesthrough a dust blocker (such as a screen of brushes or bristles orthrough a door that opens desirably at the time of calibration, with thescreen or door serving to inhibit dust or other particle collection oncalibration standard 1001A. While in preferred embodiments suchcalibration is stored and used by CPU 1005, in other embodiments thecalibration data could (also) be provided to computer 1000A, withcomputer 1000A performing the operations such as described above withrespect to CPU 1005.

In certain embodiments, more than one of spectrometer 1001 is includedin system 1000 (see, e.g., dotted line 1001B of FIG. 93). In suchembodiments, system 1000 may operate in a mode where ink(s) is/aredischarged in more than one direction of relative movement between head1003 and substrate 1004 (such as from right to left as one pass, andfrom left to right as a second pass, etc.), with data from thespectrometers being collected/analyzed to measure the ink(s) afterdischarge onto substrate 1004. In one embodiment, two spectrometersoperate simultaneously, so that an area may be measured pre-inkdischarge, then have ink discharged, then have the area where ink hasbeen discharged measured again, etc., which desirably may be achieved ina single movement (or direction of movement) of head 1003 with respectto substrate 1004. In other embodiments, such spectrometers operate andproduce data from which substrate 1004 is monitored, such as area byarea (prior to ink discharge), or by a pre-scan of substrate 1004 (suchas described elsewhere), which may include a mapping of the outerphysical dimensions of 1004. With such data, CPU 1005 (or computer1000A) could determine the physical size and/or shape of substrate 1004(and thereby automatically adjust the ink discharge based on suchdetermined size and/or shape), or could determine the likely presence ofdefects in, or the incorrect loading of, substrate 1004. In suchembodiments, one or more spectrometers could operate to ensure that inksare only discharged on substrate 1004 (and not outside an area where aportion substrate 1004 is present), thereby serving to prevent thedischarge of ink(s) except on substrate 1004 or a desired subarea ofsubstrate 1004. With such a system's ability to map or pre-analyzesubstrate 1004, system 1000 may operate in a mode where substrate 1004is analyzed to detect the presence of a desired area, which could bedenoted by physical relationship to edges or other physical or opticalfeatures of substrate 1004. As one example, a physical border could bedetermined by relationship to the edges of substrate 1004, or substrate1004 could include an optically detectable pattern or border, whichcould be detected by spectral data from spectrometer(s) 1001 and thusused to define or determine the area in which ink(s) is/are to bedischarged.

With such embodiments as previously described, it will be understoodthat system 1000 could be a printer, a copier/reproducer, scanner,robotic ink/paint/pigment discharge system, or some combination of theabove (such as a multi-function machine that operates in a color printmode, a color copier mode, a color scanner mode, etc.), with one or moreof spectrometers 1001 providing spectral/optical data in a manner tomore desirably provide such operations. As previously discussed, system1000 could operate where CPU 1005 largely or entirely receives, storesand/or processes data from spectrometer(s) 1001, while in otherembodiments a local or remote computer 1000A (also) may receive datafrom spectrometer 1001. In general, the CPU 1005 and/or computer 1000Amay receive and/or utilize data from spectrometer 1001 as describedherein. Again, system 1000 may be desirably be utilized as a generalprinting type device, and/or may be specifically designed or operated toproduce a particular type of article, such as postage, coupons, tickets,currencies, stocks, bonds, certificates, etc., and may operate in amanner to securely produce such articles, with desired or determinedspectral characteristics measured by spectrometer 1001, such as forpurposes of later determining whether the article is genuine. It shouldbe noted that particular preferred embodiments are directed to ink jettype printers, but the present invention could be utilized with certaintypes of laser printers, such as laser printers that print a first page,which is spectrally analyzed (so that subsequent pages are printed withadjustments made based on the spectral data of the actual pigment on theactual substrate), or conversely a later printer that can first print ona small area of the substrate a test print, which is then spectrallyanalyzed so that subsequent printing may be carried out based on thespectral data generated from the test print, etc.

Referring now to FIG. 94, other such preferred embodiments will now bedescribed. As illustrated, a plurality of systems 1008A, 1008B, . . .1008N may be coupled over communication links 1012A, 1012B, . . . 1012N,etc. to communication/data network 1012. Network 1012 could be a widearea network (an exemplary preferred example being the Internet orsimilar network), or a local area network. Systems 1008 could be locatedin a general physical area (such as in one or more areas of a factory orfactories), or more generally may be geographically dispersed over alarge area, including up to worldwide or even to outer space. What isimportant is that a plurality of such systems may be coupled to a commonnetwork 1012. Certain of such systems, such as system 1008A and 1010(communicating with network 1012 over link 1010A), may be coupled todatabase 1009 or 1011, respectively. While all or some portion of suchsystems may be coupled to such a database, in certain embodiments onlycertain of such systems are coupled to such a database.

In accordance with such embodiments, one or more of systems 1008(systems 1008 could be implemented as described in connection with FIG.93), etc., may operate in a mode to produce articles having at least anarea of known or predetermined spectral or optical characteristics.Thus, for example, system 1008A at a first location could produce anarticle such as an item including postage or other authentication mark,tickets, coupons, currencies, certificates, etc., with the articlehaving known or predetermined spectral/optical characteristics in one ormore areas on the article (sometimes referred to herein as an“authentication area”). The article could then be moved, such as byhuman or machine movement, carried by a postal service, courier, machineor some combination of the above, to one or more second locations, whichmay be far removed from the first location. At the second location, oneor more other systems 1008 may located to scan or read the object todetermine if the object is the genuine or an authentic first article.Thus, in general articles may be controllably produced at one location,and subsequently detected at a second location.

In one illustrative example, system 1008A may be coupled to a website ofa commercial or other enterprise. Under control of system 1008A, one ormore other systems may produce one or more articles having anauthentication area (or areas) of known or predeterminedspectral/optical characteristics. In certain preferred embodiments, theauthentication area has a known or predetermined spectral “signature” orcharacteristic that is correlated with another identification mark ormarks, such as a serial or other number, time of day and/or date, symbol(which may be graphic, pictorial, textual or otherwise). The known orpredetermined spectral characteristic, correlated with the otheridentification, may then be stored, for example in data base 1009. Insuch embodiments, under effective control of a website or other computer(e.g., system 1008A), one or more geographically remote systems (e.g.,1008B, . . . 1008N) may produce the article with the known/predeterminedspectral characteristics, which again may also include anotheridentification mark. At yet another geographically remote system (whichcould be system 1008A but in general one or more other systems such assystem 1010 which may be remote from systems 1008A, 1008B, . . . 1008N),the article may be presented in order to determine its authenticity.Such a system 1010 could be coupled to database 1011, which includes atable or other form of data storage that includes one or more of theknown or predetermined spectral/optical characteristics, preferablycorrelated with another mark. If the spectral/optical characteristicsmeasured in the authentication area and the mark, if included,correspond (within some tolerance, such as a delta E value for thespectral characteristics) to the expected data in the database, then thearticle may be determined to be genuine. If not, then the article may berejected or confiscated as non-genuine.

Databases 1009 and 1011 may exchange updates or the like so that thesystem controlling the production of the article, and the systemdetermining authenticity, operate in accordance with consistent data. Asthe spectral characteristics that are sought for purposes ofauthenticating the article may change (such as by time of day or date,random or other allocation) by the controlling system, and because thespectral characteristic that is examined could be a single or multiplespectral bands out of a variety of bands, and could include a spectralband outside the visible band (e.g., near infrared), such anauthentication method would be very difficult to circumvent. In suchembodiments, a variety of such articles (illustrative examples havepreviously been described) in which authentication is desirable could beproduced and subsequently examined at remote locations. This system andmethod may thus be utilized to facilitate a variety of electroniccommerce transactions (currency, postage, tickets, shipment documents,certificates, coupons, etc.) in which a central intelligence, computeror authority controls the production of physical articles, which maythen be readily examined and determined for authenticity.

Given the small size and relatively small cost of production, it alsowill be understood that spectrometers and spectrophotometers inaccordance with the present invention may be coupled to, or be insideof, a computer as opposed to the printer, scanner, reproducing system ofFIG. 93. As illustrated in FIG. 95, a spectrometer in accordance withthe present invention may be implemented as spectrometer 1023 coupled tocomputer 1014 such as through a PC card, USB or other serial or parallelinterface (illustrated by PC card or other interface 1022). In otherembodiments, a spectrometer is implemented as part of computer mouse1016, which preferably includes buttons of a conventional type computermouse pointing device, but also includes optical port 1017 which coupleslight to a spectrometer located within mouse 1016. In certainembodiments, mouse 1016 also includes a controlled light source, andthus implements an integral spectrophotometer (mouse 1016 may include asmall lamp and power source, such as a battery that slowly rechargesfrom the power supplied to mouse 1016, or a replaceable battery). Whatis important is that the lamp within mouse 1016 be provided sufficientpower for the spectrophotometer to make measures at a duty cycle or ratethat is suitable for the particular application. Spectrometer 1023 couldsimilarly include a light source and power supply in order to implementa computer-coupled spectrophotometer.

With a spectrometer/spectrophotometer coupled to computer 1014, avariety of desirable operations may be carried out. Much of thepreceding discussion regarding FIGS. 93 and 94 generally is applicablehere. For example, a mouse or other PC attachment device may be used ina distributed/remote electronic commerce system such as in FIG. 94,where remote systems are used to authenticate articles. In addition, aprinting device coupled to computer 1014 may produce an article, withthe spectrophotometer of the mouse or other PC attachment used to recordthe spectral signature or characteristic, which may correlated toanother mark (such as previously described) and stored in a database forsubsequent evaluation for authentication purposes or the like. Inanother exemplary electronic commerce application, an article ormaterial geographically located in proximity to computer 1014 ismeasured with the mouse or other PC attachment, with the spectralcharacteristics of the object or material being provided to one or moreremote locations (such as over the Internet), which another object ormaterial may be produced or selected, whether the other object ormaterial has spectral/optical characteristics that correspond (e.g.,match) the spectral/optical characteristics of the article or materiallocated in proximity to computer 1014.

In another exemplary application, the mouse or other PC attachment mayoperate in a spectrometer mode in which it is brought into proximity tomonitor or display 1015, which is coupled to or a part of computer 1014.In display area 1020, which may be the entirety or a portion of theuseable display area of monitor/display 1015, pattern 1021 may bedisplayed, the spectral characteristics of which may be measured by themouse or other PC attachment. In one such embodiment, software runningon computer 1014 receives spectral data from the mouse or other PCattachment based on a measurement of pattern 1021. A lookup table orother data storage within computer 1014, which includes data indicativeof the expected spectral characteristics of pattern 1021, may beaccessed. Based on the measured spectral data and the expected spectraldata, the controlling signals to monitor/display 1015 may be adjustedsuch as to color correct or color balance monitor/display 1015. Incertain preferred embodiments, a plurality of patterns 1021 aredisplayed, such as sequentially, on monitor/display 1015, and based on aplurality of measurements the controlling signals to monitor/display1015 are adjusted for such color correction purposes. It also will beappreciated that such color correction also may be done under remotecomputer control. For example, computer 1014 may be coupled over a localor wide area network (e.g., Internet), with a remote computer sendingcommands to computer 1014 (e.g., TCP/IP packets) that result in thedisplay of one or more patterns 1021 on monitor/display 1015. The useror operator would then be instructed to position the mouse or otherattachment over the pattern (an optional positioned device also may beprovided, such as to block ambient light or to more precisely positionthe mouse or other attachment in the desired location and in the desiredphysical relationship with the monitor/display), with spectral datacollected and preferably transmitted to the remote computer. In such amanner, the remote computer may either color correct image or other datato be sent to computer 1014, such that the spectral characteristics ofimages displayed on monitor/display 1015 may more precisely match thedesired spectral characteristics, preferably as determined by the remotecomputer. As will be appreciated, in electronic commerce transactions inwhich the operator of computer 1014 desires to view an article that isof known spectral characteristics (such as determined by the remotecomputer or computer 1014), the monitor/display may receive colorcorrected data from the remote computer, or may receive non-colorcorrected data from the remote computer, with computer 1014 colorcorrecting monitor/display 1015. With either technique, the operator ofcomputer 1014 may more precisely view an image with greater correlationto the actual color of the item being viewed, etc. In addition, thecolor corrected data could be sent to a local area network printer toprint a test sheet of the color corrected data in a different form (onpaper) than as viewed on a monitor/display 1015. As will be appreciated,with such a mouse or PC attachment spectrometer/spectrophotometer,articles may be produced (such as by printing or painting or otherwise)and measured, with the spectral characteristics of the articlesdetermined and transmitted to a remote location, such as forauthentication purposes, production of another article, etc. Inaddition, articles at a remote location may be displayed onmonitor/display 1015, which monitor/display 1015 color corrected (eitherby receiving color corrected data from the computer at the remotelocation or by color correction under control of computer 1014) suchthat the article viewed by the operator of computer 1014 more closelycorrespond to the article at the remote location. It will also beappreciated that these concepts are applicable in many regards to theembodiments described in connection with FIG. 93, such as, for example,where a system may produce a printed article that has spectralcharacteristics that closely correspond or match the spectralcharacteristics of the article or material at the remote location. Aswill be appreciated, electronic commerce will thus be facilitated bybeing able to view and/or produce articles in a manner that the spectralcharacteristics correspond in a desirable manner.

Calibration of the spectrometer in mouse 1016 or attachment typespectrometer 1023 may be accomplished by moving the mouse or attachmentinto proximity of pattern(s) 1021 and/or by way of calibration standard1019 that is a part of or integral with mouse pad 1018. In suchembodiments, the mouse or attachment may be calibrated by beingpositioned over pattern(s) 1021 or one or more positions on calibrationstandard 1019, with the spectral data produced by the spectrometercalibrated or normalized or adjusted as described elsewhere herein. Incertain embodiments, calibration standard 1019 of mouse pad 1018 iscovered by a protective flap, with the user lifts or removes prior tocalibrating/normalizing the spectrometer. In addition, calibrationstandard 1019 may be covered by a translucent layer, preferably having athickness less than the critical height of the fiber optic-type inputprobe to the spectrometer (such as previously described), such that thespectral characteristics of the material below the translucent layer(which may serve to protect the calibration standard, etc.) may bemeasured and used as part of the calibration process. This type oftranslucent protective layer for the calibration standard may be used inother embodiments as well (such as the embodiment of FIG. 93), which mayserve to protect the calibration standard and to facilitate itscleaning, etc. Detection or prediction of faults in calibration standard1019 may be conducted, for example, in a manner similar to thatdescribed in connection with the embodiment of FIG. 93. Alternately, thecalibration standard may be part of a disposable pad (paper or vinyl orsuch materials) of calibration standards, whereby as the calibrationstandard is used and becomes soiled or no longer accurate, it is removedfrom the pad (such as the top layer is torn off) and a new calibrationstandard is exposed for use.

Referring now to FIG. 96, additional embodiments of the presentinvention will now be described. Spectrometers of sufficiently smallsize/form factor and cost may desirably be incorporated into a scope ofvarying types, such as a sighting scope for a gun or other weapon, amicroscope, telescope, range finder, or other optical scope type ofinstrument that collects and typically focuses light for user or machineperception. In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 96, scope 1028 isillustrated with viewing field 1029, within which is arbitrary object1030. In the illustrated embodiment, object 1030 includes spectralpattern or area 1030A, which in general could be a predetermined areafor observation, the area with a scope target or “crosshair” pattern tothe like. Light from pattern or area 1030A is coupled through opticalinput 1031, which couples light detected from pattern or area 1030A tospectrometer 1026 via optical path 1032 (e.g., a fiber optic or otheroptical conduit), which is illustrated as part of base 1025, which ingeneral could be a gun or other weapon or other optical or otherinstrument. What is important is that light from pattern or area 1030Ais coupled to spectrometer 1026 for spectral analysis. It also should benoted that pattern or area 1030A may be a single color, or alternativelybe a series of colors that provided such as via an electronic patch(such as via an LCD or similar color producing device). In such anembodiment, the colors may be time coded so that the colors change in apredetermined sequence that is detectable from a spectral analysis ofthe pattern or area (if the time coded sequence is not provided, thenthe object having the patch is not detected, for example). With such atime coding, which could include a user input, such as a via a passwordor key coding or number entry, so that periodically the patch turns offor is reset and must reactivated by user input (which would foil one whohappens to have stolen, for example, a uniform that include anelectronic patch, but who would be unable to reactivate the electronicpatch). With such embodiments, the pattern or area is spectrallyanalyzed to determine if the pattern or area is a known entity. It alsoshould be noted that the patch could include an RF or similar electronicantennae in order to receive instructions to change color in a mannerknown to the detecting scope, etc.

In exemplary preferred embodiments, light from pattern or area 1030A iscoupled to spectrometer 1026 and spectrally analyzed as describedpreviously. In such embodiments, spectrometer 1026 preferably includes aCPU and stored data from which predictions could be made of the objectsited in the scope on the basis of a spectral analysis of pattern orarea 1030A. As an illustrative example, in a game or weaponsenvironment, the pattern or area could be keyed to enemies or “friends”of the scope user. For example, pattern or area 1030A could be a patchor imprinted or other area of predetermined spectral characteristics,such that a spectral analysis of the pattern or area could readilydetermine if the object under examination is an enemy or friend. Forexample, all members of the same team could include uniforms of a knownspectral characteristics (based on fabric coloration, etc.), or couldinclude a sewn or other patch that include one or more areas of knownspectral characteristics. Based on a spectral analysis of the pattern orarea, a processing intelligence coupled to or a part of spectrometer1026 could predict whether the object (e.g., person) sighted in thescope is friendly. In the illustrated embodiment, scope 1028 includesilluminator or display 1034, which may light up or otherwise displayinformation based on the spectral analysis of the pattern or area. Forexample, if the spectral characteristics determined by spectrometer 1026match stored spectral characteristics (such as within a delta E or otherrange or tolerance) of a team member, then illuminator or display 1034could display a warning or provide other indicia (e.g., red light) thatthe object is not to be shot (e.g, a friendly fire warning). Conversely,the processor or other intelligence coupled to or a part of spectrometer1026 may store spectral characteristics of the enemy, and thusilluminator or display 1034 could display information that indicatesthat the scope is directed to a suspected enemy (or opposite teammember).

Similarly, in accordance with such embodiments, spectrometer 1026 mayoutput spectral or other optical characteristics data to anothercomputing device (e.g., such as described in connection with theembodiments of FIG. 93, etc.) or display. In such embodiments, anoptical sighting or imaging device (scope 1028 being exemplary) isprovided with a field of vision, and light from a predetermined area orportion of that field of vision (again, such as in a central sightingarea or crosshairs or equivalent) directed towards a pattern or area ofan object under examination, and spectrometer 1026 outputs data based ona spectral analysis of the pattern or area. While weapons and games havebeen sighted as examples, spectrometer 1026 could be coupled to containintelligence that is adapted to look for spectral signatures ofparticular materials or the like. In such embodiment, the object underevaluation could be illuminated with a light source (not shown) onmember 1025 or other light source, and then particular spectral bands orregions could be examined in order to detect or predict the presence ofparticular materials that would be expected to reflect or emit light inthose spectral bands or regions.

FIGS. 97 to 99 illustrate data encoding methods that may be implementedin accordance with certain preferred embodiments of the presentinvention. As embodiments of the present invention enable spectralmeasurements to taken at relatively high speeds and with relatively highprecision, novel data encodings are readily achievable.

FIG. 97 illustrates an area (which may be an area of an object ormaterial), much like a conventional bar code. Spectrometer 1036 isillustrated having a examination area (e.g., evaluation spot size) 1037,from which light from the object or material is coupled to spectrometer1036 for spectral analysis such as previously described herein.Spectrometer 1036 and the object or material preferably move withrespect to each other, with defines examination path 1038, whichpreferably traverses a plurality of areas or bars 1039A, 1039B . . .1039N. While vertically-extending stripes are illustrated, it is to beunderstood that other areas/shapes are possible (see., e.g, FIG. 99). Italso should be noted that light may be externally provided with a lightsource, but in preferred embodiments spectrometer 1036 includes its ownlight source (and thus may be considered a spectrophotometer) thatilluminates and analyzes an examination area 1037. In accordance withsuch embodiments, spectrometer 1036 traverses areas or bars 1039 suchthat spectral data is collected as spectrometer 1036 traverses areas orbars 1039. A processor coupled to or a part of spectrometer 1036 maystore and then analyze the collected spectral data. With spectrometertaking samples such as at speeds up to thousands of samples per second(or more or less, depending upon the application), spectral data of thevarious bars or areas 1039 may be collected with relative movementbetween spectrometer 1036 and the object or material (again thespectrometer may move relative to the object or material, or vice versa,and in certain preferred embodiments spectrometer 1036 is part of ahandheld measuring device or a robotic-type measuring device, such thatthe bars or areas 1039 may be conveniently spectrally analyzed). A formfactor much like a conventional bar code scanner may be utilized.

As illustrated in FIG. 98, spectral data of each bar or area 1039 may becollected by spectrometer 1036, and in certain embodiments is utilizedas part of a data encoding process. As an illustrative example, FIG. 98illustrates one spectrum (400 to 700 nm being exemplary) of a single baror area. As the data output of spectrometer 1036 is in essence aspectrum of the light from bar or area (the spectral resolution may bevaried by the number and types of filters, etc., as will be understoodfrom the previous description), various spectral bands may be utilizedfor data encoding. FIG. 98 illustrates spectral bands under examinationat 400, 425, 450 . . . 725 nm, with the examined bands of approximately5 nm; it is to be understood that additional spectral data may bepresent between the examined bands (e.g., a more or less semi-continuousor continuous band of spectral data), or filters may be positioned justat the bands under examination.

In accordance with the present invention, accurate and rapid spectralmeasurements may be taken, and thus each color bar or area 1039 mayencode a plurality of bits of data. As illustrated in FIG. 98, forexample, each spectral band may encode up to two or more bits of data.As one example, the spectral intensity may have one or more thresholdvalues, such that an intensity below a first threshold is encoded asdata 00, an intensity about the first threshold but below a secondthreshold is encoded as data 01, an intensity about the second thresholdbut below a third threshold is encoded as data 10, and an intensityabove the third threshold but below a fourth threshold (the fourththreshold is optional) is encoded as data 11. It will be understoodthat, based on the foregoing description, additional or another numberof thresholds or ranges may be provided such that within an examinedspectral band multiple bits of data may be encoded. As illustrated, thespectral band at 400 nm is detected as data 01, the spectral band at 425nm is detected as data 11, the spectral band at 450 nm is detected asdata 00, etc. As will be appreciated, within one spectral band, aplurality of data bits may be encoded, and within one measure bar orarea 1039 multiple spectral bands may be simultaneously analyzed. As aresult, a single spectral measurement maybe used to encode a largenumber of bits of data (the simple example of FIG. 98 showing 14 bands,with 2 bits per band).

In accordance with particular embodiments, a predetermined spectral band(such as 550 nm) is used for normalization or other detection purposes.In one example, the 550 nm band (or other predetermined band) is usednot for data encoding but for its presence above a particular thresholdor at a particular level. For example, as spectrometer is scanned acrossmultiple bars or areas 1039, in a first bar or area the 550 nm bandcould be present at predetermined level, and then in the next bar orarea the 550 nm band could be absent or alternatively present but at alower level. As the 550 nm band is analyzed, with its spectral data forthis band going up or down in an expected pattern as spectrometer 1036traverses bars or areas 1039, the 550 nm band could be used to detectwhen a bar or area boundary has been traversed. This may also be used tocalculate the speed in which spectrometer 1036 is traverses bars orareas 1039, for example. In addition, such a particular band may be usedas a reference band, such that the thresholds used for determining thedata is based on a spectral intensity relative to the reference band.Thus, if, for example, the overall intensity falls, such as a reducedlamp output or the like, relative intensities as compared to thereference intensity may be utilized for more reliable data encoding. Itwill also be understood that a plurality of reference bands may beprovided, such as a number of reference bands distributed over thespectrum of interference, preferably interspersed with numerous dataencoding bands. Such variations are also contemplated with the presentinvention.

While FIG. 97 illustrates a series of bars or areas 1039, which may bethought of as a multi-level/multi-bit color bar code, FIG. 99illustrates an array of areas, such as squares, rectangles or circlessuch that spectrometer 1036 (or multiple spectrometers 1036) maytraverse the object or material in a number of paths 1038A, 1038B, . . .1038N. As a result, the data encoding technique described herein may beextended to more than one dimension, such that data may be encoded in anarray form (M columns by N rows being illustrated), with each area ofthe array being used for data encoding as previously described. Ofcourse, a first area (or other number) could be defined to haveparticular spectral characteristics such that spectrometer 1036, upondetection of these characteristics, would be able to predict that it isover the first (e.g, reference) area.

With spectrometers in accordance with the present invention, relativelydense and low cost data encoding may be implemented in a variety ofmanners, included those previously described. Other variations arepossible and within the scope of the present invention. For example,data could be encoded not by intensity threshold determinations, but bylooking for intensity changes between spectral bands or from onespectral bar or area to another (which may be the next one or some otherpredetermined band). In certain embodiments, this may be used forsecurity purposes, as the data encoder and the data detector may beimplemented so that other instruments do not know the data encoding orencryption pattern. Thus, data detected via spectral analysis may bequite secure in that only the detecting device will know the dataencoded pattern that was utilized.

It should be understood that, in accordance with the various alternativeembodiments described herein, various spectrometer-type devices, anduses and methods based on such devices, may be obtained. The variousrefinements and alternative and additional features also described maybe combined to provide additional advantageous combinations and the likein accordance with the present invention.

Reference is made to the following copending applications, all by theinventors hereof, which are hereby incorporated by reference: U.S.application Ser. No. 09/198,591, filed on Nov. 23, 1998; U.S.application Ser. No. 09/091,208, filed on Jun. 8, 1998, which is basedon International Application No. PCT/US97/00126, filed on Jan. 2, 1997,which is a continuation in part of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/581,851,now U.S. Pat. No. 5,745,229, issued Apr. 28, 1998, for Apparatus andMethod for Measuring Optical Characteristics of an Object; U.S.application Ser. No. 09/091,170, filed on Jun. 8, 1998, which is basedon International Application No. PCT/US97/00129, filed on Jan. 2, 1997,which is a continuation in part of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/582,054,now U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,030 issued Jun. 2, 1998, for Apparatus andMethod for Measuring Optical Characteristics of Teeth; PCT ApplicationNo. PCT/US98/13764, filed on Jun. 30, 1998, which is a continuation inpart of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/886,223, filed on Jul. 1, 1997, forApparatus and Method for Measuring Optical Characteristics of an Object;PCT Application No. PCT/US98/13765, filed on Jun. 30, 1998, which is acontinuation in part of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/886,564, filed onJun. 30, 1998, for Apparatus and Method for Measuring OpticalCharacteristics of Teeth; U.S. application No. 08/886,566, filed on Jul.1, 1997, for Method and Apparatus for Detecting and PreventingCounterfeiting; and U.S. application No. 09/113,033, filed Jul. 9, 1998,for Method and Apparatus for Measuring Optical Properties of an Object.

Additionally, it should be noted that the implements and methodologiesmay be applied to a wide variety of objects and materials, illustrativeexamples of which are described elsewhere herein and/or in theco-pending applications referenced above. Still additionally,embodiments and aspects of the present invention may be applied tocharacterizing gems or precious stones, minerals or other objects suchas diamonds, pearls, rubies, sapphires, emeralds, opals, amethyst,corals, and other precious materials. Such gems may be characterized byoptical properties (as described elsewhere herein) relating to thesurface and/or subsurface characteristics of the object or material. Asillustrative examples, such gems may be characterized as part of a buy,sell or other transaction involving the gem, or as part of a valuationassessment for such a transaction or for insurance purposes or the like,and such gems may be measured on subsequent occasions to indicatewhether gem has surface contamination or has changed in some respect orif the gem is the same as a previously measured gem, etc. Measuring agem or other object or material in accordance with the present inventionmay be used to provide a unique “fingerprint” or set of characteristicsor identification for the gem, object or material, thereby enablingsubsequent measurements to identify, or confirm the identity ornon-identity of, a subsequently measured gem, object or material.

It also should be noted that the implements and methodologies describedin the co-pending applications referenced above also may be applied toembodiments and features of the present invention as described herein.All such refinements, enhancements and further uses of the presentinvention are within the scope of the present invention.

1. An apparatus for measuring spectral characteristics of receivedlight, comprising: one or more light receivers, wherein the receivedlight is received by the one or more lights receivers; one or morespectral sensors coupled to receive at least a portion of the receivedlight, wherein the one or more spectral sensors measure the intensity ofthe received light in one or more predetermined spectral bands; and aprocessor, wherein the processor receives data corresponding to one ormore light intensities measured by the one or more spectral sensors;wherein the processor determines a data value of at least two bits basedon the received light measured in each of the one or more predeterminedspectral bands, wherein the data value for each spectral band isdetermined based on the measured light intensity level of the receivedlight in each spectral band.
 2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the atleast two bits of the data value are determined based on a comparison ofa measured intensity value with a plurality of threshold values.
 3. Theapparatus of claim 2, wherein intensities of received light are measuredin N spectral bands, wherein M bits of data value are determined foreach spectral band, wherein M times N total bits of data value aredetermined.
 4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein N and M are eachgreater than one.
 5. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein at least onespectral band comprises a reference band.
 6. The apparatus of claim 5,wherein the processor determines the data value for each of the one ormore predetermined spectral bands based on a measured intensity value ofthe reference band.
 7. The apparatus of claim 5, wherein the one or morelight receivers is/are moved relative to an object or material, whereina plurality of data values are determined as the one or more lightreceivers is/are moved relative to the object or material.
 8. Theapparatus of claim 7, wherein at least one measured intensity value ofthe reference band is used to determine a position of the one or morelight receivers relative to the object or material.
 9. The apparatus ofclaim 7, wherein measured intensity values of the reference band areused to calculate a speed of movement value corresponding to a speed ofmovement of the one or more light receivers relative to the object ormaterial.
 10. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the one or more lightreceivers is/are moved relative to an object or material, wherein aplurality of data values are determined as the one or more lightreceivers is/are moved relative to the object or material.
 11. Theapparatus of claim 1, wherein at least one data value is determined as afunction of a measured intensity in one spectral band and a measuredintensity in a second spectral band.
 12. The apparatus of claim 1,wherein at least one data value is determined as a function of ameasured intensity in a first predetermined spectral band in a firstarea of an object or material and a measured intensity in a secondpredetermined spectral band in a second area of the object or material,wherein the first area is different from the second area.
 13. Theapparatus of claim 12, wherein the first predetermined spectral bandcomprises a different spectral band from the second predeterminedspectral band.
 14. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the apparatuscomprises a color bar code reader.
 15. The apparatus of claim 1, whereinthe received light passes through one or more interference filterelements prior to being measured by the one or more spectral sensors.16. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the received light passes througha plurality of interference filter elements prior to being measured by aplurality of spectral sensors.
 17. The apparatus of claim 16, whereinthe plurality of interference filter elements comprise a color gradientfilter.
 18. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the one or more spectralsensors comprise one or more light to frequency converter sensingelements.
 19. An apparatus for measuring spectral characteristics ofreceived light, comprising: one or more light receivers, wherein thereceived light is received by the one or more lights receivers, whereinthe received light comprises light in a plurality of predeterminedspectral bands; a plurality of spectral sensors coupled to receive atleast a portion of the received light, wherein the plurality of spectralsensors measure the intensity of the received light in the plurality ofpredetermined spectral bands; and a processor, wherein the processorreceives data corresponding to a plurality of light intensities measuredby the plurality of spectral sensors; wherein the processor determinesat least one data value as a function of a measured intensity in onespectral band and a measured intensity in a second spectral band.
 20. Anapparatus for measuring spectral characteristics of received light,comprising: one or more light receivers, wherein the received light isreceived by the one or more lights receivers, wherein the received lightcomprises light in a plurality of predetermined spectral bands; aplurality of spectral sensors coupled to receive at least a portion ofthe received light, wherein the plurality of spectral sensors measurethe intensity of the received light in the plurality of predeterminedspectral bands; and a processor, wherein the processor receives datacorresponding to the plurality of light intensities measured by theplurality of spectral sensors; wherein the processor determines at leastone data value as a function of a measured intensity in a firstpredetermined spectral band in a first area of an object or material anda measured intensity in a second predetermined spectral band in a secondarea of the object or material, wherein the first area is different fromthe second area.